Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
BMW M2 COMPETITION.
Thank you for choosing a BMW M2.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW M2. Also use
the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important informa‐
tion on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical fea‐
tures available in your BMW M2. The manual also contains information de‐
signed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW M2.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 8
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ............................................................................................................................ 18
Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 22
On the road ...................................................................................................................... 27
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 36
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 40
Voice activation system ............................................................................................... 49
General settings ............................................................................................................. 52
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 64
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 68
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ............................................................................ 85
Transporting children safely ....................................................................................... 98
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 102
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 119
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 133
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 138
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 157
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 163
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 172
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 181
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 191
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS
BMW M2 Technology ............................................................................................... 198
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 199
Loading .......................................................................................................................... 203
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 206
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 210
Fuel .................................................................................................................................. 212
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 214
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 229
Engine oil ....................................................................................................................... 232
Coolant ........................................................................................................................... 236
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 238
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 240
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 246
Care ................................................................................................................................. 253
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 260
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 262
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 264
© 2019 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 II/19, 03 19 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
NOTES
Information .................................................................................................... 8
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐
lar topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
printed book from the service center.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Additional sources of
information
Service center
A service center will be glad to answer questions
at any time.
Internet
Vehicle information and general information on
BMW, for instance. on technology, are available
on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. Additional
information, refer to page 64.
BMW Driver's Guide app
Driver’s Guide App shows the most suitable in‐
formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
stalled in the vehicle will be explained.
BMW Driver’s Guide Web
Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐
formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s
Guide Web can be displayed in any current
browser.
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in
order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
serious damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions.
Seite 8
NOTES
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Symbol Meaning
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system.
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice
activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as a
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐
native possibilities are presented as a list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Vehicle features and
options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
lustrates features and functions that are not
available in a vehicle, for example because of the
selected optional features or the country-specific
version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
any questions that you may have about the fea‐
tures and options applicable to your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived to
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Heed the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
Seite 9
Information
NOTES
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the
vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
erating conditions and registration requirements
applying in the country of first delivery, also
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be
operated in a different country it might be neces‐
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the
homologation requirements in a certain country
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐
ranty is available from a service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Warning
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
sensors and thereby result in a safety risk.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Have paintwork or paintwork
repairs on bumpers of vehicles with radar sen‐
sors performed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
only.
Advanced technology, for instance the use of
modern materials and high-performance elec‐
tronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair
work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
BMW center. If you choose to use another serv‐
ice facility, BMW recommends use of a facility
that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair,
according to BMW specifications with properly
trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's
Manual as "another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐
quent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
sory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
their use and installation are available from a
BMW center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
cles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be used
with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
warning:
Warning
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals
Seite 10
NOTES
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
known to the State of California to cause can‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐
hicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
ing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
tions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
mologation requirements. You should also be
aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
US models.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in damag‐
ing the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by
the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐
hicle. Electronic control units process data they
receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or
exchange with each other. Some control units
are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or
provide assistance during driving, for instance
driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control
units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions.
Information about stored or exchanged data can
be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle, in a separate booklet, for example.
Seite 11
Information
NOTES
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Personal reference
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle
identification number. Depending on the country,
the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐
cle identification number, license plate and corre‐
sponding authorities. In addition, there are other
options to track data collected in the vehicle to
the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the
ConnectedDrive account that is used.
Operating data in the vehicle
Control units process data to operate the vehicle.
For example, this includes:
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the ve‐
hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not
stored beyond the operating period.
Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐
nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐
nical information. Information about the vehicle
condition, component usage, maintenance re‐
quirements events or faults can be stored tem‐
porarily or permanently.
This information generally records the state of a
component, a module, a system, or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components, for
instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
tery status.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, for instance lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
ment of the driving stability control systems.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
The data is required to perform the control unit
functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recog‐
nize and correct malfunctions, and helps the ve‐
hicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
The majority of this data is volatile and is only
processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small
share of the data is stored event-related in event
or fault memories.
When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
ance measures, this technical information can be
read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
cle identification number.
A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop can read out the in‐
formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read
out the data.
The data is collected, processed, and used by
the relevant organizations in the service network.
The data documents technical conditions of the
vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault,
compliance with warranty obligations and quality
improvement.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐
bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐
ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle.
The data from the vehicle can also be used to
check customer claims for warranty and guar‐
anty.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be
reset when a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop performs
repair or servicing work.
Data entry and data transfer into
the vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort
and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐
cle and modified or reset at any time.
For example, this includes:
Seite 12
NOTES
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
tions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐
tertainment and communication system of the
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the re‐
spective equipment:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is
found on a device that has been connected to
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it
can be deleted at any time.
This data is only transmitted to third parties upon
personal request as part of the use of online
services. The transmission depends on the se‐
lected settings for the use of the services.
Incorporation of mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements.
The sound and picture from the mobile device
can be played back and displayed through the
multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐
ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐
pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐
cludes, for instance position data and other
general vehicle information. This optimizes the
way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐
tion or music playback, work.
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
bile device and the vehicle, such as active access
to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed further is deter‐
mined by the provider of the particular app being
used. The extent of the possible settings de‐
pends on the respective app and the operating
system of the mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
this enables data to be exchanged between the
vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
phones. This wireless network connection
enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
clude online services and apps supplied by the
vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
website. The relevant legal information pertaining
to data protection is provided there too. Personal
data may be used to perform online services.
Data is exchanged over a secure connection,
for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle
manufacturer intended for this purpose.
Any collection, processing, and use of personal
data above and beyond that needed to provide
the services must always be based on a legal
permission, contractual arrangement or consent.
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the
data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐
ception of functions and services required by law
such as Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other providers,
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐
vant provider and subject to their data privacy
Seite 13
Information
NOTES
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐
changed during this process. Information on the
way in which personal data is collected and used
in relation to services from third parties, the
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
tained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
formation if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
Engine compartment
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
Windshield
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
Seite 14
NOTES
Information
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 15
Information
NOTES
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ....................................................................................................... 18
Set-up and use ........................................................................................... 22
On the road ................................................................................................. 27
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Entering
Opening and closing
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the trunk lid
4 Panic mode
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the remote control again to unlock the
other vehicle access points.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the remote control.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Button for central locking system
Overview
Button for the central locking system.
Unlocking and locking
Pressing the central locking system button locks
or unlocks the vehicle with the doors closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
Seite 18
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Unlocking the vehicle
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐
er's or front passenger door with your finger for
approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐
dle.
Unlocking the trunk lid
▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button on
the trunk lid.
▷ If carrying the remote control, press the but‐
ton on the trunk lid.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked.
Displays and control
elements
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel
1 Light switch element
2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal
3 Instrument cluster
4 Start/Stop button
5 Wiper system
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when the engine
is started or the ignition is switched on.
Seite 19
Entering
QUICK REFERENCE
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Driver's door
1 Power windows
2 Exterior mirrors
Switch console
1 Selector lever
2 Controller
3 Drivelogic
4 Parking brake
5 ▷ Driving dynamics systems
▷ Parking assistance systems
iDrive
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller and, depending on the equipment
version, the touchscreen.
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main menu.
Press twice: displays all menu items
of the main menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu for
navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Press once: opens the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Opens the Options menu.
Voice activation
Using the voice activation system
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is
active.
If no other commands are possible, operate the
function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Information on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior
mirror.
Seite 21
Entering
QUICK REFERENCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Set-up and use
Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel
Manually adjustable seats
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Electrically adjustable seats
1 Memory function
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/back, height, tilt
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Adjusting the steering wheel
Manual steering wheel adjustment
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the
LED is lit. The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a seat adjustment
switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat position
on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.
Entering the rear
Manual forward/back adjustment
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Manual forward/back adjustment:
original position
1.
Push the seat back into the original position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Electric forward/back adjustment
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
3. To change the entry area:
▷ Press and hold this button until the
seat has moved to the desired posi‐
tion. Releasing the button stops window/
roof movement.
▷ Press the button briefly. The seat
automatically moves to the end po‐
sition. Pressing again stops the motion.
Seite 23
Set-up and use
QUICK REFERENCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Electric forward/back adjustment:
original position
1. Moving the seat to its original position:
▷ Press and hold this button until the
seat has returned to its original po‐
sition. Releasing the button stops window/
roof movement.
▷ Press the button briefly. The seat
moves to its original position. Press‐
ing again stops the motion.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest back.
Infotainment
Radio
Control elements
1 Changing the entertainment source
2 Sound output on/off, volume
3 Programmable memory buttons
4 Changing the station/track
5 Eject CD/DVD
6 CD/DVD drive
7 Changing the waveband
Navigation destination entry
Entering a destination via address
State/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
4. Move the Controller to the right to select the
state from the list.
Entering the address
The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/city
1.
"City/Postal code?"
2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/city.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house
numbers from the list.
Starting destination guidance
"Start guidance"
If only the town/city was entered: destination
guidance is started to the town/city center.
Connecting a mobile phone
After the mobile phone is connected once to the
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spoken in‐
structions.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
6. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
tooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device
and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
Using the phone
Accepting a call
Incoming calls can be accepted via iDrive or the
button on the steering wheel.
Via iDrive
"Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster
Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept"
Dialing a number
1. "Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Enter the numbers.
4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
Establish the connection via the additional
phone:
1.
Press the button.
2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Seite 25
Set-up and use
QUICK REFERENCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list.
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
On the road
Driving
Starting and stopping the engine
Ignition on/off
▷ On: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Most of the indicator/warning
lights light up for a varied
length of time.
▷ Off: press the Start/Stop button again.
All indicator lights go out.
▷ Radio-ready state: when the ignition is
switched off, press the ON/OFF button on
the radio or when the engine is running, press
the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
Start/stop engine
M double-clutch transmission: starting
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: starting
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
M double-clutch transmission: switching
off
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake, if needed.
Manual transmission: switching off
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Manual transmission: switches the engine off au‐
tomatically while stationary to save fuel. As soon
as the clutch pedal is depressed, the engine
starts automatically.
M double-clutch transmission: switches the en‐
gine off automatically while stationary to save
fuel. The engine starts automatically when the
brake pedal is released.
Parking brake
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
Seite 27
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Manual transmission
Shifting
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive speeds
can damage the engine. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. When shifting into 5th or 6th
gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift
lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse
gear with a forward shifting movement.
M double-clutch transmission
Engaging selector lever positions
Press on the brake pedal and pull or push the se‐
lector lever in the corresponding direction.
▷ R: reverse gear.
▷ N: neutral.
▷ Center position, forward position.
▷ +: manual upshifting.
▷ -: manual downshifting.
▷ D/S: switch between drive mode and sequen‐
tial mode.
D is Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automatically
changed.
S is Sequential mode
Use the shift paddles or the selector lever to up‐
shift or downshift without letting off the gas.
R is reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic vehicle washes, for instance.
The vehicle can then roll.
P Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off, if the vehicle
is in radio-ready state or if the ignition is
switched off and if position R or D is set.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is set.
High beams, headlight flasher,
turn signal, roadside parking
light
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Turn signal
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.
▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point
in the opposite direction.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
Canada: roadside parking light
To illuminate the vehicle on one side.
▷ On: with the ignition switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point.
▷ Off: press the lever back into the standard
position.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and
brief wipe
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Seite 29
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the lever up once from its
standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield and
headlights
Pull the lever.
Climate control
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
AUTO program.
Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Button Function
Recirculated-air mode
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Rear window defroster.
Seat heating.
Automatic climate control with
enhanced features
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode/AUC.
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrost and defog window.
Button Function
Rear window defroster.
Seat heating.
Refueling
Refueling
Fuel cap
1.
Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap to
open it.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without met‐
allic additives.
Information on the recommended fuel grade can
be found in the Owner's Manual.
Seite 31
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure values can be found
on the sign on the door pillar.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Electronic oil measurement
Requirements
Depending on the previous displays, the status
display appears when the engine is running or af‐
ter the vehicle has been driven for at least 30 mi‐
nutes.
Displaying the engine oil level
On the Control Display:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to
these messages.
Adding engine oil
General information
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle
before engine oil is added.
Adding
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
sage.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Seite 32
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Breakdown assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance
Via iDrive:
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established to BMW
Roadside Assistance.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Depending on the equipment version, Teleservi‐
ces comprise the following services:
▷ Roadside Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Automatic Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
Seite 33
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 36
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 40
Voice activation system ............................................................................ 49
General settings ......................................................................................... 52
Owner's Manual media ............................................................................. 64
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Cockpit
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 82
2 Exterior mirror operation 94
3 Glove compartment on the driver's side 192
Driver assistance systems
Intelligent Safety 146
Lane departure warning 153
4 Lights
Light switch 133
Lights off
Daytime running lights 135
Parking lights 133
Low beams 133
Seite 36
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Automatic headlight control 134
Adaptive light functions 135
High-beam Assistant 135
Instrument lighting 136
5 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 107
High beams, headlight flasher 107
High-beam Assistant 135
Roadside parking lights 133
Onboard Computer 129
6 M double-clutch transmission: shift pad‐
dles 113
7 Steering wheel buttons, left
M Drive 1 activation 157
M Drive 2 activation 157
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 163
Cruise control: to store the speed
Cruise control: to resume the
speed
Cruise control rocker switch
8 Instrument cluster 119
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication 8
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 8
Voice activation 49
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 8
Thumbwheel for selection lists 128
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 103
Auto Start/Stop function 104
11 Steering column stalk, right
Wipers 108
Rain sensor 109
Cleaning the windshield and head‐
lights 110
12 Horn, entire surface
13 Heated steering wheel 96
14 Adjusting the steering wheel 96
15 Unlocking the hood 230
Seite 37
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 40
2 Glove compartment 191
3 Ventilation 178
4 Hazard warning system 246
Central locking system 73
5 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation 8
6 Climate control 172
7 Controller with buttons 40
8 Parking brake 107
9 Drivelogic 116
10 PDC Park Distance Control 165
Rearview camera 168
11 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 159
Engine Dynamics 118
Servotronic 161
12 M double-clutch transmission, selector
lever 113
Manual transmission, selector lever 112
Seite 38
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
iDrive
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller and, depending on the equipment
version, the touchscreen.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Input and display
Letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters,
numbers and characters.
Symbol Function
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
Confirm entry.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter entered and
letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry for
which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available in
iDrive.
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Seite 40
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area of
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Network search.
Cellular network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mo‐
bile phone has been reached.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are being loaded.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music hard disk.
Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Online Entertainment.
WiFi.
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Split screen, split screen display
General information
Additional information, for instance information
from the Onboard Computer can be displayed in
several menus on the right side of the split
screen display, referred to as the split screen.
The additional information remains visible even
when switching to another menu on the split
screen.
Switching on/off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Seite 41
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus which
support the split screen function.
1. Move the Controller to the right until the split
screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1. Move the Controller to the right until the split
screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display, with touchscreen depending
on the equipment version
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions, refer to page 256.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically
The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1. Press the button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
Controller with navigation
system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 47.
Seite 42
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐
plays, for example.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main menu.
Press twice: displays all menu items
of the main menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Button Function
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu for
navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Press once: opens the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation
system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
Seite 43
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ Tilt in two directions to switch between dis‐
plays, for example.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main menu.
Press twice: displays all menu items
of the main menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Press once: opens the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Opens the Options menu.
Operating via the
Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Adjusting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Select a menu item.
3. To move the menu item to the desired posi‐
tion, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Seite 44
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
2. Press the Controller.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
The current display closes and the previous
display is shown.
▷
Press the button.
The previous display re-opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
The new display opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press and hold this button.
The recently used menus are displayed.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for the
selected menu, for instance "Save station".
Changing settings
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
2. : confirm entry.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters or
number.
Hold the Controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐
played at the left edge.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are dis‐
played on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Operation via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not use
any objects.
Seite 45
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Opening the main menu
Tap on the symbol.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Adjusting the main menu
1.
Tap on the symbol.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Drag the menu item to the desired position
on the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Tap the desired menu item.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
Changing settings
Settings such as brightness can be changed via
the touchscreen.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness"
6. To perform the desired setting:
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on the symbol.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1.
Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.
A keyboard appears in the Control Display.
2. Enter letters and numbers.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: deletes the let‐
ter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol all
letters: deletes all letters or numbers.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Seite 46
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller.
Selecting functions
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": use the map.
▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐
lecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the be‐
ginning. When entering, pay attention to the fol‐
lowing:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, you may need to change be‐
tween upper and lower-case letters, numbers
and characters, refer to page 45.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Control‐
ler.
Entering special characters
Input Operation
Delete a charac‐
ter.
Swipe to the left on the
touchpad.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐
per area of the touchpad.
Enter an under‐
score.
Swipe to the right in the
lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be moved
via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Storing a function
1.
Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
Seite 47
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Executing a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately. This means,
for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for ap‐
prox. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 48
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Display
can be operated by voice commands via the
voice activation system. The system supports
you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐
hicle is stationary can only be operated via
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐
tent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐
structions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of the
voice activation system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system so
that the spoken commands can be identified.
To set the language, refer to page 52.
Using the voice activation
system
Activating the voice activation
system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is
active.
No other commands may be available. In this
case, operate the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Using a smartphone via voice
activation
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be
used via voice activation.
Seite 49
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Activate voice command response on the smart‐
phone for this purpose.
1.
Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Voice command response is activated on the
smartphone.
2.
Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice command
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears
on the Control Display.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
spoken as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You can also select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the re‐
spective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
▷ Some possible commands for the current
menu.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
Help on the voice activation
system
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the tone
settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Adjusting
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog or
a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Seite 50
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Activating voice recognition via
the server
The voice recognition feature via the server pro‐
vides a dictation function and a natural method of
entering destinations while improving the quality
of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is
transmitted to a service provider and stored lo‐
cally there.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be de‐
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐
rupted, for instance due to background noise or
talking.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Setting the language
The language to be used for voice activation and
system announcements can be set.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired language.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐
ume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Information for Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 247,
close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Seite 51
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
General settings
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Language
Setting the language
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
For voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 50.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
Setting the time format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Seite 52
AT A GLANCE
General settings
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
Setting the date format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
You can set the units of measurement for some
values, for example, consumption, distances and
temperature.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current
vehicle position
Concept
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current
vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be activated
or deactivated.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 53
General settings
AT A GLANCE
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Selecting the contents of the
main menu
You can select the displayed contents for some
menu items in the main menu.
1. Press the button.
2. "Contents of main menu"
3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service
or the BMW Connected app.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Service requirements messages.
▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.
Messages are additionally displayed in the status
field.
Retrieving messages
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the mes‐
sage is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control messages
or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can
be deleted from the list.
Check Control messages or messages from the
vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
Seite 54
AT A GLANCE
General settings
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
3.
Press the button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Adjusting
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or prior‐
ity.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different functions, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for
some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted using
iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music hard disk.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Note and follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
Seite 55
General settings
AT A GLANCE
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
The deletion process takes 15 minutes to com‐
plete.
If not all data was deleted, repeat the deletion.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for using
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
type to select depends on the mobile device and
the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible functions
and the suitable connection types for them. The
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
vice.
Function Connec‐
tion type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Using the smartphone Office
functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Using compatible apps via
iDrive.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Function Connec‐
tion type
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing driver
profiles.
Performing software updates.
Exporting and importing stored
trips.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐
cess.
Internet hot‐
spot.
Using Apple CarPlay apps via
iDrive and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
The following connection types require one-time
pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ Internet hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
Paired devices are automatically recognized later
on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Seite 56
AT A GLANCE
General settings
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 62, can be
performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 57, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
the vehicle, refer to page 57.
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
be required on the device; refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be activated
prior to pairing.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting, e.g.:
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short mes‐
sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes,
and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can
be incurred by transmitting all data to the
vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact pic‐
tures.
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Activate the function to use Apple Car‐
Play.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 57
General settings
AT A GLANCE
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device will
be used:
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device
and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list, refer to page 61.
If connection was not successful: Frequently
Asked Questions, refer to page 58.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections from
the device list on the mobile phone and start
a new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge the mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperatures for
mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly con‐
figured, for instance as Bluetooth audio de‐
vice.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
stance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Seite 58
AT A GLANCE
General settings
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone func‐
tion.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on
the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact the
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones.
The snap-in adapter features a separate USB
port that is automatically connected when a
compatible mobile phone is inserted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
MP3 players.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charge current via the USB interface if
the device supports this. Follow the maximum
charge current of the USB interface.
The following uses are possible on USB interfa‐
ces with data transfer:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer
to page 76.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 62.
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB storage de‐
vices available on the market, it cannot be
guaranteed that every device is operable on
the vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB storage devices to ex‐
treme environmental conditions, such as very
high temperatures; refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 57, with USB
interface.
Seite 59
General settings
AT A GLANCE
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 188.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 61.
Internet connection
General information
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the Inter‐
net hotspot.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 57, with
WiFi interface.
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
▷ WiFi activated on the device.
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating the Internet hotspot
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Connecting a device to the Internet
hotspot
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device. Se‐
lect network name on the device.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
You will need to purchase data volume from a
service provider when you first connect to the In‐
ternet via the Internet hotspot.
All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased from
the ConnectedDrive Store.
Adjusting
The network name and hotspot code can be
changed. In addition, the network name can be
hidden so that it cannot be found by other devi‐
ces.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4.
Press the button.
5.
▷ "Change hotspot key"
Enter the desired hotspot code.
▷ "Change hotspot name"
Enter the desired network name.
▷ "Hide hotspot"
Activate or deactivate the function.
6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or net‐
work name:
Select the symbol.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
Seite 60
AT A GLANCE
General settings
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 57.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
switched on on the iPhone.
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple
CarPlay preparation.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Pair the iPhone with the vehicle via Bluetooth, re‐
fer to page 57.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list, refer to page 61.
Operation
For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
from the list of stored vehicles under Blue‐
tooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the
hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
matically recognized and reconnected when
the ignition is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, for instance authorization, see
owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired or connected with the vehicle
are displayed in the device list.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is
used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
Seite 61
General settings
AT A GLANCE
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Symbol Function
"Apps"
"Internet hotspot"
"Apple CarPlay"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
vice that is already connected and the device will
be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
The device's connection to the vehicle is discon‐
nected.
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 62.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the device
when it is reconnected. The functions may be
deactivated on a device already connected.
Deleting the device
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Swapping the telephone and
additional phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the vehi‐
cle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, for example mobile phones and MP3
players. Software updates are available for many
of the supported devices. The vehicle is kept up-
to-date via regular vehicle software updates.
Updates and related current information is availa‐
ble at www.bmw.com/update.
Seite 62
AT A GLANCE
General settings
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Displaying the version of the
installed software
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional informa‐
tion.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1.
Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
interface, refer to page 188.
3. "My Vehicle"
4. "iDrive settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10.Wait for the update to complete.
11.Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version
You can restore the software to the version prior
to the last update or to its factory settings.
The software may only be restored when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is restored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Seite 63
General settings
AT A GLANCE
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
You can use the following media formats to call
up the content in the Owner's Manual:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 64.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 64.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
fered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
printed book from the service center.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the instructions of the Supplementary
Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition
to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1.
Press the button.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired method of accessing the
contents.
Scrolling through the Owner's
Manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be dis‐
played directly.
Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Seite 64
AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and
the Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press the button again to return to the
last displayed function.
5.
Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The entry points into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 47, and called up directly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press the desired programmable
memory button and hold for more than 2 sec‐
onds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
Seite 65
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 68
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................... 85
Transporting children safely .................................................................... 98
Driving ....................................................................................................... 102
Displays ..................................................................................................... 119
Lights ......................................................................................................... 133
Safety ........................................................................................................ 138
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 157
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 163
Climate control ......................................................................................... 172
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 181
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 191
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐
tery, refer to page 70.
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐
sion, various settings, refer to page 79, can be
configured for the button functions.
A personal driver's profile, refer to page 76, for
each remote control is stored in the vehicle.
To provide information on maintenance require‐
ments, the service data is stored in the remote
control, refer to page 238.
To prevent possible locking in of the remote
control, take the remote control with you when
exiting the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.
Warning
Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Seite 68
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the trunk lid
4 Panic mode
Unlocking
Press the button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 79,
the following access points are unlocked:
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button on the remote control again
to unlock the other vehicle access points.
▷ All doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals
and the horn. This function must be activated
in the settings, refer to page 79.
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, refer
to page 76, are applied.
▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position
saved in the driver's profile. This function
must be activated in the settings, refer to
page 79.
▷ The interior lights, refer to page 137, are
switched on, unless they were manually
switched off.
▷ Depending on the settings, the welcome light
and headlight courtesy delay feature, refer to
page 134, are switched on.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 80, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
Pressing and holding the button on the remote
control opens the windows and the glass sun‐
roof.
Locking
1.
Close the driver's door.
2.
Press the button on the remote control.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap
are being locked.
▷ Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and
the horn. This function must be activated in
the settings, refer to page 79.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 80, is
switched on.
If the engine or ignition is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the engine or ignition must be
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy light
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior lights
were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
the button again.
Seite 69
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Trunk lid
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
doors are also unlocked when unlocking with the
remote control. To perform settings, refer to
page 79.
The trunk lid can only be opened if it is not
locked. Separately lock the trunk lid, refer to
page 76.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Opening
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the remote
control, refer to page 72.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐
ing a pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a type CR 2450 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the remote con‐
trol until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to
page 70.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a different
location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 72.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the remote control
It is not possible to start the engine if the remote
control has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the remote control with its tip against
the marked area on the steering column. Pay
attention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and re‐
peat the procedure.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in re‐
mote control?
▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
ices of the BMW Connected app include the
ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.
This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
Seite 71
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key can also be used for the
glove compartment on the front passenger side.
Safety information
Warning
Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When
pulling the door handle with the integrated key
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
the outside door handle.
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door
lock
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door lock
using the integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with
the remote control or switch on the ignition, if
needed, through emergency detection of the re‐
mote control, refer to page 71.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Button for central locking
system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.
Overview
Button for the central locking system.
Unlocking and locking
Press the button. For locking, the doors must be
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Opening
▷
Press button to unlock the doors to‐
gether, and then pull the door handle above
the armrest.
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door han‐
dle twice: the first time unlocks the door, the
second time opens it. The other doors remain
locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening trunk lid.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle near the
doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Seite 73
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐
er's or front passenger door with your finger for
approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐
dle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Convenient closing
Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
Closing
Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐
er's or front passenger door, arrow, with your fin‐
ger and hold it there without grasping the door
handle.
This corresponds with pressing and holding the
button on the remote control.
In addition to locking, the windows and the glass
sunroof close. The exterior mirrors fold in, de‐
pending on the model.
Opening the trunk lid
General information
If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Opening
Press the button on the trunk lid.
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
The trunk lid is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 70.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control
or using the integrated key, refer to page 72.
Trunk lid
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
doors are also unlocked when unlocking with the
remote control. To perform settings, refer to
page 79.
The trunk lid can only be opened if it is not
locked. Separately lock the trunk lid, refer to
page 76.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Opening and closing
Opening from the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press the button on the trunk lid.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked. For unlocking with the remote
control, refer to page 70.
Seite 75
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
The trunk lid opens slightly and can be swung
upward.
Opening from the inside
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area.
Closing
Grasp the recess grip and pull trunk lid down.
Locking separately
General information
The switch in the glove compartment decouples
the trunk lid from the central locking system, so it
can no longer be opened.
If the glove compartment is locked with the
integrated key, the remote control can be
handed over without the integrated key, for in‐
stance to a valet parking service. It is then no lon‐
ger possible for objects to be removed from the
cargo area even with the remote control.
Securing
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, arrow 2.
Slide the switch into the desired position.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Driver profiles
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐
eral drivers can be stored and called up again
when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles as‐
signed.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote control,
the assigned personal driver profile will be acti‐
vated. All settings stored in the driver profile are
automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will apply the personal settings as it is
being unlocked. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the mean‐
time by a person with a different remote control.
Changes to the settings are automatically stored
in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the
settings stored in it will be applied automatically.
The new driver profile is assigned to the remote
control currently used.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
There is an additional guest profile available that
is not assigned to any remote control. It can be
used to apply settings in the vehicle without
changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allocated
to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and func‐
tions are stored in the active profile. The scope
of storable settings depends on country and
equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ TV.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position, steer‐
ing wheel position where applicable.
Both the positions saved via the seat memory
and the last position set are saved.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a differ‐
ent driver profile may be activated. This allows
you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if
you did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐
mote control.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the selected driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to the
remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a dif‐
ferent remote control, this driver profile will
apply to both remote controls.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that are
stored in none of the three personal driver pro‐
files.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Seite 77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently in use
are reset to their factory settings.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before delivering
the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver pro‐
files can be taken into another vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profile.
▷ "USB device"
Select the USB storage device, as
needed, refer to page 59.
▷ Online.
Importing driver profiles
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the imported
driver profile.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
▷ Online.
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during
start
The driver profiles can be displayed at each
startup to select the desired profile.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote control
and driver may not be possible in the following
cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or
her own remote control, but another person
is driving.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls with
him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located outside
of the vehicle.
Adjusting
General information
Depending on the package and country version,
various settings are available for the remote con‐
trol functions.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 76, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Trunk lid
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, this setting may not be offered.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4.
The text next to the symbol indicates the cur‐
rent setting.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
The trunk lid unlocks.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The trunk lid and the doors are unlocked.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver
profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions.
The most recent position is independent of the
positions saved via the seat memory.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐
ing by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Seite 79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the
horn.
Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
while if no door is opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after you
drive off.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or
the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐
ing the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis.
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐
nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-
Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard
Diagnosis, refer to page 239.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing the exterior lighting.
Switching on/off
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or Comfort Access, the alarm
system will also switch on or off at the same
time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 81.
Opening the trunk lid with the
alarm system switched on
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Indicator light on the interior
mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured.
When the still open access points are closed,
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐
sor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
til the engine ignition is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
ing.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
and interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or
switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of the remote control,
refer to page 71.
▷ With Comfort Access:
If you are carrying the remote control on your
person, grasp the door handle on the driver's
or front passenger door completely.
Seite 81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Power windows
Safety information
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the windows is clear
during opening and closing.
Overview
Power windows
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance point.
The window opens while the switch is being
held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
For convenient opening via the remote control,
refer to page 69.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is being
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 74.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door frame
and window while a window is being closed.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐
terrupted and the window opens slightly.
Safety information
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Glass sunroof, electric
General information
The glass sunroof is ready for operation when
the ignition is switched on.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
does not move.
Opening/closing the glass
sunroof and sun protection
▷ Press the switch in the desired
direction to the resistance
point and hold it there.
Holding down the switch
opens the glass sunroof and
sun protection together.
The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being held.
The sun protection can be
manually closed.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past
the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sun protection open
automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. The
sun protection can be manually closed.
Pressing the switch upward stops the motion.
For convenient opening via the remote control,
refer to page 69.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 73.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a certain value when
closing the glass sunroof, the closing operation is
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open
position, or it is stopped when closing from the
tilted position. The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Seite 83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Closing from the open position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection. Make sure that
the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without
jam protection.
Initializing after a power
interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
ated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The engine is running.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until initialization is complete.
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
has opened then closed again.
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally, fol‐
low the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Seats, refer to page 85.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 89.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 91.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 138.
Seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐
sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety
belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting
the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
most upright position as possible and do not
adjust again while driving.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Seite 85
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired di‐
rection.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages properly.
Height
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back‐
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight to
the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en‐
gages properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for
the profile currently used. When the vehicle is
unlocked via the remote control, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to
page 79, is activated for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 93.
Overview
1 Memory function
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Seite 87
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Backrest width
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral
support when taking corners.
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjusting
the side wings of the backrest.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width increases.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Entering the rear
Safety information
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat back‐
rest while driving may occur if the rear seat
backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control could be
lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock
the rear seat backrests before driving.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Manual length adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjustment.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Original position
1.
Push the seat back into the original position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Electric forward/backward
adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjustment.
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
3. To change the entry area:
▷ Press and hold this button until the
seat has moved to the desired posi‐
tion. Releasing the button stops window/
roof movement.
▷ Press the button briefly. The seat
automatically moves to the end po‐
sition. Pressing again stops the motion.
Original position
1. Moving the seat to its original position:
▷ Press and hold this button until the
seat has returned to its original po‐
sition. Releasing the button stops window/
roof movement.
▷ Press the button briefly. The seat
moves to its original position. Press‐
ing again stops the motion.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest back.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and
safety belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐
fer protection when adjusted correctly.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Seite 89
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
the safety belts checked after an accident at
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1.
Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's
and passenger's seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Belt holder
To make it easier to use the belt in the front sit‐
ting positions, place the safety belt in the belt
holder.
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
After setting the height, make sure that the head
restraint engages correctly.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Seite 91
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
1. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Height
Adjusting
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the head
restraint engages correctly.
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Folding down the head restraint
Only fold the head restraint back if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
▷ To the back: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint back, arrow 2.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 76.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐
ing settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Safety information
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Ve‐
hicle control could be lost. There is a risk of ac‐
cident. Only retrieve the memory function when
the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Seite 93
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Overview
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the
LED is lit. The LED goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a seat adjustment
switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat position
on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.
Call up deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via
the remote control, the position is automatically
retrieved if the function, refer to page 79, is acti‐
vated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be stored
using the memory function, refer to page 93.
Safety information
Warning
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
by looking over your shoulder.
Overview
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press the button.
The mirror movement follows the button
movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
Folding in and out
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
needed and when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐
ror are used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other format‐
ting issue - low-lying obstacles when parking,
for instance.
Activating
1.
slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side
mirror position.
Interior mirror, manually
dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mir‐
ror, flip the lever forward.
Seite 95
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the
vehicle is stationary only.
Adjusting
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 97
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Always transport children in the
rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of age
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
in suitable child restraint systems designed for
the age, weight and size of the child. Children
13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
no longer be used due to their age, weight, or
size.
Safety information
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
If you need to use a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. For automatic deactivation
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 140.
Safety information
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child re‐
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐
stalling, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint systems
and their fastening systems which have been
damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐
ited or lost. For instance, a child can may not be
sufficiently restrained in the event of an acci‐
dent or braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Do not use damaged child restraint systems or
child restraint systems that have been exposed
to an accident, and replace them instead.
Have damaged child restraint systems or child
restraint systems exposed to an accident and
their fastening systems checked and, where
applicable, replaced by the dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
Before installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 140.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
and bring it as far up as possible to obtain the
Seite 99
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
best possible position for the belt and to offer
optimal protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the front passenger seat carefully forward
until the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger seat,
open the backrest width completely. Do not
change the backrest width again and do not call
up a memory position.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten
child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation from the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐
straint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
Warning
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair, (2),
of LATCH symbols.
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
er's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint systems
with tether strap
Safety information
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes the upper anchor.
Warning
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In certain situations, for instance
braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,
the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that
the rear backrests are locked.
NOTICE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of
child restraint systems are only provided for
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
child restraint systems to the upper anchors.
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the anchor
for the upper retaining strap. Seats with
an upper top tether are marked with this
symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest
or the rear window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining
strap to the anchor
1.
Remove the anchor cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between or
along both sides of the supports of the head
restraint to the anchor.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Seite 101
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Driving
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off and
starts the engine.
M double-clutch transmission: the
engine starts with the brake pedal
pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with the
clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop button
is pressed.
Ignition on
M double-clutch transmission: press the Start/
Stop button, but do not press on the brake pedal
at the same time.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button
without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐
tronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
M double-clutch transmission: press the Start/
Stop button again without stepping on the brake.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button
again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐
tronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
When switching off the ignition, the transmission
position P is engaged automatically if the selec‐
tor lever position D or R is engaged.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is stationary
and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, even if the low
beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐
pletely, so that the engine can still be started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
some minutes of no use.
Radio-ready state
General information
In the radio-ready state, certain power consum‐
ers remain ready for operation.
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Driving
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Activating
With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
button.
If the engine is not running and the ignition is
switched on: the system automatically activates
radio-ready state when the door is opened if the
lights are switched off or the daytime running
lights are switched on.
Radio-ready state remains active if, for instance
the ignition is automatically switched off for the
following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with
the Start/Stop button.
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐
pletely, so that the engine can still be started.
Starting the engine
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
NOTICE
In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is
not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
quick succession.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
M double-clutch transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Seite 103
Driving
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Engine stop
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
M double-clutch transmission
Switching off the engine
1. Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to a
stop.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The en‐
gine starts automatically for driving off.
General information
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/Stop
function is active, it is available when the vehicle
is traveling faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Driving
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically during a
stop under the following conditions:
M double-clutch transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
D.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
situations such as the following:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or
cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
ing conditions:
▷ M double-clutch transmission: by releasing
the brake pedal.
▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is pressed.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it will
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length
of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when
the air conditioning is switched on.
Seite 105
Driving
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Double-clutch transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position D to N, R or D/S.
▷ M double-clutch transmission: accelerating
while simultaneously applying the brake.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur,
for instance if the brake pedal is depressed a
number of times in succession.
Preventing an automatic engine
stop with M double-clutch
transmission
Concept
To make it possible to drive off very quickly, such
as at an intersection, the automatic engine stop
can be actively prevented.
Preventing an engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented within
one second after the vehicle comes to a stand‐
still:
▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
standstill, briefly press the brake pedal force‐
fully.
▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal brak‐
ing force.
Activating/deactivating the
system manually
Using the button
Press the button.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic en‐
gine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
tivated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
be switched off permanently, for instance when
leaving it.
M double-clutch transmission:
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
Selector lever position P is engaged automat‐
ically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Driving
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,
for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Parking brake
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower light: indicator light in Canadian
models
If for once use during driving is required, engage
the parking brake slightly and hold the button
down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set.
Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Seite 107
Driving
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indi‐
cates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Driving
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
tion 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system
switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not
start.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Seite 109
Driving
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Setting the frequency or sensitivity
of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or
sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield and headlight
washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
is empty.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle's lights are switched
on.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated when‐
ever the ignition is switched on.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under
frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Driving
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their
resting position and are ready again for oper‐
ation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
Warning
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.
Seite 111
Driving
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
system. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
mixing ratios provided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
correct readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Manual transmission
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
NOTICE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk
of damage to property. When shifting into 5th
or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the
right.
Schematic diagram
▷ 1 – 6: forward gears
▷ R: reverse
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Shifting
General information
Depending on the engine installation, the engine
speed during a shifting operation is adjusted au‐
tomatically as required for harmonious and dy‐
namic gear shifting.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift
lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse
gear with a forward shifting movement.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power, for instance in a vehicle wash, or
be pushed.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a
forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.
M double-clutch
transmission with
Drivelogic
General information
The M double-clutch transmission with Drive‐
logic is an automatic shift transmission with two
clutches and partial transmissions in which the
gears can be changed without interrupting the
tractive force.
The operation is via the selector lever or two shift
paddles on the steering wheel.
Functions
▷ Drive mode or Sequential mode.
▷ Various drive programs, Drivelogic.
▷ Automatic downshifting and protection from
misshifting even in sequential mode.
▷ Launch Control.
▷ Low Speed Assistant.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Selector lever, selector lever
positions
Overview
▷ R: reverse gear.
▷ N: neutral.
▷ Center position, forward position.
▷ +: manual upshifting.
▷ -: manual downshifting.
Seite 113
Driving
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ D/S: switch between drive mode and sequen‐
tial mode.
Engaging a selector lever position
Press on the brake pedal and pull or push the se‐
lector lever in the corresponding direction.
As soon as the selector lever is released, it re‐
verts to the center position. In position R, the se‐
lector lever locks.
The engaged selector lever position is displayed
in the instrument cluster and on the selector
lever.
If a selector lever position is engaged, the vehicle
may start rolling, after the brake is released, for
instance on downhill slopes. Thus, drive off im‐
mediately after releasing the brake.
Use the Slow Speed Assistant for maneuvering
and during stop-and-go traffic.
Low Speed Assistant
Concept
The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at
very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking
speed.
This can also be used for rocking the vehicle in
the snow. To do this, switch between reverse
gear and forward gear without stepping on the
brakes in the process.
Safety information
NOTICE
When using the function and simultaneously
stepping on the brake pedal for a longer time,
the transmission can overheat. There is a risk of
damage to property. When using the function,
do not brake for a longer period.
Activating
1.
Engage a driving position.
2. Briefly tap the accelerator pedal.
In 1st and 2nd gear and in reverse, the vehicle
rolls at minimum speed.
Deactivating
Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to a
stop.
Flashing display on the selector
lever of the double clutch
transmission
The actually engaged transmission position can
deviate from the selector lever position in some
situations. The display in the selector lever
flashes.
Observe the display in the instrument cluster in
these cases.
D is Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automatically
changed.
Kickdown: for maximum acceleration, for in‐
stance when passing. To do this, depress the ac‐
celerator pedal past the resistance point.
Switch to Sequential mode: shift using the shift
paddles or the selector lever, or push the selec‐
tor lever in the D/S direction.
S is Sequential mode
Use the shift paddles or the selector lever to up‐
shift or downshift without letting off the gas.
▷ Shortly before falling below a gear-dependent
minimum speed, the transmission is automat‐
ically downshifted.
▷ Upshifting or downshifting is done only if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate.
E.g., there is no downshifting if the engine
speed is too high.
▷ Kickdown: the lowest possible gear is se‐
lected by simultaneously operating the kick‐
down and the left shift paddle or selector
lever.
▷ It is also possible to start out in 2nd gear, for
instance on icy roads.
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Driving
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Switch to Drive mode: push selector lever in D/S
direction.
R is reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
It is also possible to rock the vehicle up to
6 mph/10 km/h. To do this, switch between for‐
ward gear and reverse gear without stepping on
the brakes in the process.
N is Neutral
The vehicle may roll in selector lever position N,
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 253.
P Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off, if the vehicle
is in radio-ready state, refer to page 102, or if
the ignition is switched off, refer to page 102,
and if position R or D is set.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is set.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Start the engine while pressing on the brake
pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched on,
and a Check-Control message is displayed.
The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when the ignition is switched off. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch
ignition off in vehicle washes.
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever po‐
sition P is automatically engaged after approx.
15 minutes.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example: P.
Notice
When the external temperature is very low, the
display may not work. Current driving direction is
recognizable at the engaged selector lever posi‐
tion.
Gear change
General information
Shifting in Sequential mode possible.
A shift in Drive mode causes a switch to Sequen‐
tial mode.
Using the selector lever
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
Seite 115
Driving
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Using the shift paddles on the
steering wheel
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Drivelogic
General information
Various driving programs are available.
After each switch between Sequential mode and
Drive mode, the last program selected is an ac‐
tive.
Exception: after each engine start, driving pro‐
gram 1 is active in Drive mode.
In Drive mode
Choice of three driving programs:
▷ D1: efficient driving.
▷ D2: relaxed driving.
▷ D3: sporty driving.
In Sequential mode
Choice of three driving programs:
▷ S1: comfortable shifting operations.
▷ S2: sporty, fast shifting operations.
▷ S3: maximum shifting speed, Launch Control.
Selecting driving program using
button in center console
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired driving program is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Selecting driving program using
M Drive
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. "Transmission"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached and press the Controller.
▷ "D1" to "D3": Drive mode.
▷ "S1" to "S3": sequential mode.
5. Selecting another driving program.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel:
▷
▷
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Driving
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Warning
Depending on the setting, the DSC may only
be available to a limited extent or may not be
available with activated M drive. There may be
a risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
Heed the settings for DSC in the M drive and
react actively, if necessary. Modify your driving
style and react, if necessary.
Display in the instrument cluster
Selected driving program corre‐
sponds to the number of illumi‐
nated fields.
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 199, period.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of
at least 6 miles/10 km.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving
away with Launch Control.
Activate Launch Control
1.
Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 159.
2. Select Sequential mode with gear 1.
3. With the engine running, apply the brake with
the left foot.
4. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The starting engine speed adjusts.
5. If necessary, change the starting engine
speed by 500 rpm via cruise control.
6. Release the brake, the vehicle accelerates.
Continue to depress the accelerator pedal.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the
accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
Launch Control is available again only after a cer‐
tain distance has been driven.
System limits
This transmission has an overheating protection
mechanism, which protects the clutch from ex‐
treme stress.
▷ Indicator light lights up yellow: trans‐
mission too hot.
Avoid high engine stress and fre‐
quent starts.
▷ Indicator light lights up red: transmission is
overheating.
Further driving at a moderate pace is possi‐
ble. At the next opportunity, stop the vehicle,
shut off the engine and allow the transmis‐
sion to cool down.
Avoid frequent, fast starts. On uphill grades, do
not keep the vehicle stationary by applying a
small amount of acceleration while riding the
clutch, as this may cause the transmission to
overheat.
During traffic jams or at very low speeds, use the
Low Speed Assistant, refer to page 114.
Seite 117
Driving
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
M Engine Dynamics
Control
Concept
The M Engine Dynamics Control affects the re‐
sponse of the vehicle to accelerator pedal move‐
ments.
Programs
Response behavior options:
▷ "Sport Plus": spontaneous, direct. Maximum
dynamics.
▷ "Sport": sporty, dynamic.
▷ "Efficient": efficient, comfortable. Minimal
consumption.
Ideal, for instance in city traffic or on snow.
Selecting a channel
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. "Engine"
4. Select the desired channel.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel:
▷
▷
Using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the de‐
sired program is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Display in the instrument cluster
Engine Dynamics Control with selected
program with activated Display of the
system states of the driving dynamics,
refer to page 126.
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Driving
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Displays
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Messages, for instance Check Control
3 Tachometer 123
4 Current consumption
Driving dynamics systems
5 Electronic displays
6 Fuel gauge 123
7 Reset miles 123
Seite 119
Displays
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
messages in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator/warning lights in the instrument
cluster can light up in a variety of combinations
and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when the engine
is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country versions: pas‐
senger belt is not worn or objects are de‐
tected on the front passenger seat.
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt
on the driver or passenger side is not buckled.
The safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner may
not be working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For releasing the parking brake, refer to
page 107.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance warn‐
ing is issued, for example when there is
the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase the distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another vehicle at a relatively high dif‐
ferential speed.
Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Person warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a detected person is im‐
minent, the symbol lights up and a signal
sounds.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
The Brake Assistant function may not
activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the
longer braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Displays
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify
your driving style to the driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
DSC, refer to page 159.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control deactivated
DSC is deactivated.
DSC, refer to page 159.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
M Dynamic Mode MDM is switched on.
M Dynamic Mode (MDM), refer to
page 160.
Indicator light also flashes: MDM controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilized.
Indicator lights light up: MDM has mal‐
functioned. Have the system checked by
a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
M Dynamic Mode (MDM), refer to
page 160.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 145.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
formation in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and then continuously
lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐
sure can be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 141.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
Seite 121
Displays
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 239.
Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under certain
circumstances warns if a detected lane is
left without flashing beforehand.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 153.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 107.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are switched
on.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 135.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the control
elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 108.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
utively.
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Displays
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
tor/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐
played again after the ignition is switched off.
Fuel gauge
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause the
display to vary.
Follow the information on refueling.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes too
hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
A red indicator light is displayed.
Check the coolant level.
Odometer and trip
odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Showing/resetting miles
Press the button.
▷ When the ignition is switched
off, the time, the external tem‐
perature and the odometer are
displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip od‐
ometer is reset.
Seite 123
Displays
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There is
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
Display
The external temperature is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Gear display with
Drivelogic
Sequential mode
▷ Engaged gear, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, arrow 2.
Drive mode
▷ Engaged gear together with a
D, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, arrow 2.
Range
General information
When the remaining range is low:
▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the On‐
board Computer.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance fast
cornering, the engine function is not always
ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Displays
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Display
The current range is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Current consumption
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you are
currently driving in an efficient and
environmentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current
consumption
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the current consumption can also be displayed
as bar in the instrument cluster.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. If necessary, "M dynamic driving systems"
The display for the current consumption
is active.
Display of the driving dynamics systems,
refer to page 126.
Energy recovery
Display
In coasting overrun mode the ki‐
netic energy of the vehicle is con‐
verted to electrical energy. The
vehicle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be re‐
duced.
EfficientDynamics display
Displaying Efficient Dynamics
Information on consumption and technology can
be displayed while driving.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying consumption history
The average consumption can be displayed
within an adjustable time frame.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
Selecting route length
1. Press the button.
2. Select the desired setting.
Resetting consumption history
1. Press the button.
2. "Reset consumption history"
Seite 125
Displays
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Displaying EfficientDynamics
info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
Driving dynamics systems
Display
The driving dynamics system
states are displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Symbols Description
M Engine Dynamics Control, refer
to page 118.
Servotronic, refer to page 161.
Activating/deactivating
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. If necessary, "M dynamic driving systems"
The display for the driving dynamics
systems is active.
Display Current consumption, refer to
page 125, and Energy recovery, refer to
page 125.
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After the ignition is switched on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving distance
or time to the next scheduled maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service required
may be displayed on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Displays
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your
vehicle is due for service.
You can check when your dealer’s service center
was notified.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most efficient gear
for the current driving situation.
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in the sequential
mode of the M double clutch transmission and
for the manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
gaged gear is displayed.
M double-clutch transmission:
displaying
Example Description
Efficient gear is set.
Shift into efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs
with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc.,
are also detected and compared with the vehi‐
cle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor,
and will be displayed depending on the situation.
The system takes into account the information
stored in the navigation system and also displays
speed limits present on routes without signs.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
Seite 127
Displays
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Display
General information
Speed Limit Info is permanently displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Speed Limit Info not available.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by
objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
lowing can be displayed or operated using the
buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel and the display in the instrument cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Phone redial.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dynamics
Control.
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Displays
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Activating a list and adjusting
the setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the
thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
1.
Turn the thumbwheel and select the desired
setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display
Depending on the equipment version, the list in
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
tration.
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐
age values.
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display of the
instrument cluster. Pressing the button repeat‐
edly displays additional information.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever calls up the following information in the
Info Display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Engine oil temperature.
▷ Vehicle speed.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of ar‐
rival.
When destination guidance is activated in the
navigation system.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance to
destination.
When destination guidance is activated in the
navigation system.
Seite 129
Displays
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Selecting information
You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
Indication in the Info Display
The information from the On‐
board Computer is shown in the
Info Display in the instrument
cluster.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driving
style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average consumption
The average consumption is calculated for the
period while the engine is running.
The average consumption is calculated for the
distance traveled since the last reset by the On‐
board Computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in the
calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
Engine oil temperature
Concept
The current engine oil temperature is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
As soon as the optimum operating temperature
has been attained, the indicator is in the center
position.
General information
If the engine oil along with the engine becomes
too hot, a check control message is displayed
too.
When the engine oil temperature is too
high, a red indicator light is displayed.
Display
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Displays
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Distance to destination
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
tance remaining to the destination is displayed if
a destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted auto‐
matically.
Time of arrival
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment, the estimated time of arrival
is displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system be‐
fore the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Onboard Computer on the
Control Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are available
on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
consumption, are displayed. The values can
be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
view of a specific route and can be reset as
often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
5. If necessary, "OK"
Sport displays
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the current
values for performance and torque can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Displaying sport displays
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
Seite 131
Displays
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Adjusting
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as
the speed warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
Symbols Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 145.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": Status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐
fer to page 141.
"Engine oil level": Electronic en‐
gine oil level check, refer to
page 232.
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 122.
"Service required": displaying
service requirements, refer to
page 126.
"Teleservice Call": Service Re‐
quest.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Displays
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Lights
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Symbol Function
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is
switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically
switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to start the engine.
Canada: when parking, switch on the one-sided
roadside parking light, refer to page 133.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Seite 133
Lights
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance point.
Switching off
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
ambient brightness, individual light functions may
be switched on briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
,
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay illuminated for a particular
time if the high beams are switched on after
radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
cipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day, the
low beams are not switched off immediately but
instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched on.
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Lights
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch
the lights on manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the ig‐
nition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Adaptive light functions
Concept
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐
tion of the roadway.
General information
The adaptive light functions may consist of one
system or multiple systems, depending on the
equipment version:
▷ Adaptive Light Control, refer to page 135.
Activating
Position of switch:
The adaptive light functions are active when the
engine is running.
Adaptive Light Control
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows the
course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Light Control does not swivel to the opposite
lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐
ances out acceleration and braking processes as
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to
avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of
the road is optimized.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically switches
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
Seite 135
Lights
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 108.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situation that require
this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the following
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Adjusting
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior lights,
footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights
are controlled automatically.
The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Lights
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
Switching the interior lights
on/off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights
on/off
Press the button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐
ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
the front and rear.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior.
Selecting the color scheme
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the brightness of
the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumb‐
wheel for the instrument lighting or on the Con‐
trol Display.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 137
Lights
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Safety
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate protection.
Side airbag
In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐
tects the side of the body in the chest and lap
area.
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Safety
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Head airbag
In the event of a side impact, the head airbag
protects the head.
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐
pact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of
a frontal impact.
Protective effect
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-
end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
Warning
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag
system cannot provide protection as intended
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐
timum protective effect of the airbag system.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag is triggered.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
the dashboard.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
son.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
senger side must stay clear - do not attach
adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
cover panels, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front passenger seat that
are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
Customer Relations for further information.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
found on the sun visors.
Seite 139
Safety
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Functional readiness of the
airbag system
Safety information
Warning
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not touch individual components.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning light in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the
operational readiness of the entire airbag system
and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning light does not come on when the ig‐
nition is switched on.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the
front-seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
ance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
Warning
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Safety
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags indicates the operating state of the front-
seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint sys‐
tem or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
vated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
restraint system has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and
front-seat passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
seat passenger airbags very much depends on
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system warns you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Seite 141
Safety
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
tion pressure and, depending on the model, the
tire temperature.
Further information and instructions on using the
system can also be found under Tire inflation
pressure, refer to page 214.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was
performed with the correct tire inflation pres‐
sure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted
to a new value, a reset was performed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐
tive.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the color
of the wheels and a SMS text message on the
Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning related
to the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐
sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
Additional information
The status control display additionally shows the
current tire inflation pressures and, depending on
the model, tire temperatures. The values shown
are instantaneous measurements and may vary
depending on driving style or weather conditions.
Resetting the system
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor…".
After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire
inflation pressures are accepted as reference val‐
ues. The reset is completed automatically while
driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
on the Control Display are shown in green and
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Safety
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
"Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for
recommended pressures." is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. There is a risk
of accident. Do not continue driving. Repair the
flat tire or replace the wheel.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too
low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately. Do
not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas sta‐
tion, check and correct the tire inflation pres‐
sure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 143
Safety
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the air pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage
of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked and replaced
at the next opportunity.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure performing a reset
The system does not function properly if a reset
has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐
rect.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may not
be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the following
situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
▷ The system was unable to complete the re‐
set. Perform a system reset again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
Seite 144
CONTROLS
Safety
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐
tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new
value, an initialization was performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can be
displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐
justed.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Seite 145
Safety
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat
tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire
inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. There is a risk
of accident. Do not continue driving. Repair the
flat tire or replace the wheel.
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. To do this,
check the air pressure in all four tires, for in‐
stance using the tire pressure gage of a flat
tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
tem.
3. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
changing the wheel.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐
face.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels,
high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the
driver assistance systems.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems
that can help prevent an imminent collision.
These systems are active automatically every
time the engine is started using the Start/Stop
button:
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Safety
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ Approach control warning with City light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 148.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 151.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automatically
active after every departure.
Press button: the systems are switched
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are switched on. The
LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Seite 147
Safety
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Approach control warning
with City light braking
function
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In the
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
pact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The Brake Assistant function activates and ap‐
plies the brakes with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
The approach control warning is available even if
cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
tentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary
with the current driving situation.
Braking is performed at speeds up to approxi‐
mately 35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Safety
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching off
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on. The
LED lights up.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is
imminent, a warning symbol appears on the in‐
strument cluster.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is provided, for instance when there
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed when there is an
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle
approaching another object at a high speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there is
an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is as‐
Seite 149
Safety
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
sisted by a minor automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
During a warning, the maximum braking force is
used. This requires the brake pedal to be de‐
pressed sufficiently quickly and forcefully. If there
is a risk of collision, the system may assist with
braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low
speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking interven‐
tion up to a complete stop, the engine may be
shut down.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
example:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mirror
is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Safety
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Daytime pedestrian
collision mitigation
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents with
pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a colli‐
sion with pedestrians, and support this with a
light braking function.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
General information
In sufficiently bright conditions, the system is‐
sues a warning of a possible risk of collision with
pedestrians in the speed range from approx.
6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h
The system reacts to people who are within the
detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Seite 151
Safety
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching off
Press button: the systems are switched
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are switched on. The
LED lights up.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way is
imminent, a warning symbol appears on the in‐
strument cluster.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
During a warning, the maximum braking force is
used. This requires the brake pedal to be de‐
pressed sufficiently quickly and forcefully. If there
is a risk of collision, the system may assist with
braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low
speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking interven‐
tion up to a complete stop, the engine may be
shut down.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Safety
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is limited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
example:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐
cle on roads with lane markings is about to leave
the lane.
General information
Depending on the country version, the system
issues a warning at speeds between
35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this speed,
a message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The time of the warning may
vary depending on the current driving situation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
and traffic safety. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
sponse to a warning.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
Seite 153
Safety
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Lane departure warning
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was
detected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates.
If the turn signal is switched on before changing
the lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Safety
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lights indicate emergency brak‐
ing to the traffic behind. This can reduce the risk
of a rear-end collision.
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights additionally light up.
Fatigue alert
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it
is recommended that the driver takes a break.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.
Function
The system is switched on each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of
trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommenda‐
tion to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
Seite 155
Safety
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
After a break, another recommendation to take a
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no
warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Safety
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐
tive safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the
braking distance to a minimum during an emer‐
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System
ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
M Drive
Concept
Individual settings can be carried out in two pre‐
assigned configurations for the vehicle.
When the engine is started, an efficient vehicle
state is active by default. M Drive is deactivated.
General information
Configurations
The configurations are preassigned as follows:
▷ "M Drive 1": relaxed, comfortable driving.
▷ "M Drive 2": sporty, dynamic driving.
Setting options
Symbol Meaning
"DSC" Dynamic Stability Control
DSC, refer to page 159,
and M Dynamic Mode
MDM.
"Engine" Programs of M Engine Dy‐
namics Control, refer to
page 118.
"Steering" Programs of Servotronic,
refer to page 161.
"Transmission" Drivelogic, refer to
page 116: shift modes and
Drivelogic driving pro‐
grams.
Configuring M Drive
The preassigned configurations can be individu‐
ally adjusted.
Seite 157
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. Select the desired setting option.
4. Select the desired channel.
Individual settings are stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
When M Drive is active, any changes to the set‐
ting are immediately applied.
Activating/deactivating M Drive
Activating
Press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel:
▷ Activate M Drive 1.
▷ Activate M Drive 2.
If DSC OFF or MDM is set in M Drive, a mes‐
sage appears in the instrument cluster. This
message is confirmed by pressing the button
again.
Deactivating
Press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel.
Indicator lights
Symbol Description
Indicator light comes on: corre‐
sponding M Drive is activated.
Indicator light flashes: M Drive
could not be activated.
Antilock braking system ABS or
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
directly regulate the driving sta‐
bility.
Reactivate M Drive if indicator
light is no longer flashing.
Performing M Drive settings
using the buttons
If M Drive is activated, individual settings can also
be modified outside of M Drive, for instance us‐
ing the buttons in the center console. This deac‐
tivates M Drive.
To reactivate all settings made for M Drive on
the Control Display, briefly press one of the fol‐
lowing buttons:
▷
▷
To adopt the changed settings in M Drive, press
and hold the corresponding button.
Reset M Drive
Individual settings can be reset to default values.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. "Reset M1" or "Reset M2"
4. "OK"
To cancel resetting: "Cancel"
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
engine speed and by applying brakes to the indi‐
vidual wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not longer
than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator
light for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument
cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
Seite 159
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light go
out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
Concept
M Dynamic Mode makes it possible to drive on a
dry roadway with high longitudinal and transverse
acceleration but with limited vehicle stability.
Only in the absolute limit area does the system
intervene for stabilization by reducing the engine
power and by braking interventions on the
wheels. In this driving condition, additional steer‐
ing corrections may be necessary.
You may find it useful to briefly activate MDM
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-
covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driv‐
ing off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Safety information
Warning
When M Dynamic Mode is activated, stabilizing
interventions are carried out only to a reduced
extent. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate. Do not jerk
the steering wheel in response to a warning.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating MDM
Press the button briefly.
The MDM and DSC OFF symbols in the
instrument cluster light up.
Deactivating MDM
Press the button.
The MDM and DSC OFF symbols go out.
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. "DSC"
4. "MDM"
To open M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel:
▷
▷
A message appears in the instrument cluster.
This message is confirmed by pressing the but‐
ton again.
Deactivating MDM
Press the appropriate button 1 or button 2 on
the steering wheel again.
M Dynamic Mode and the settings selected un‐
der M Drive are deactivated.
Seite 160
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Symbols light up:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
DSC indicator light also flashes:
M Dynamic Mode controls the
drive forces and braking forces.
Indicator lights light up:
M Dynamic Mode or DSC has
failed.
Active M differential
Concept
The active M differential provides for continu‐
ously variable locking of the rear axle differential
depending on the driving situation. This prevents
individual rear wheels from spinning even when
DSC is switched off and in M Dynamic Mode,
enabling optimum traction to be achieved in all
driving situations.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her driv‐
ing style to the situation.
Servotronic
Concept
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steer‐
ing function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher ones.
This makes it easier to park, for instance, and
makes steering firmer when driving at faster
speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts according
to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel
or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.
Programs
Steering force setting options:
▷ "Sport Plus": high.
▷ "Sport": medium.
▷ "Comfort": low.
Selecting a channel
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. "Steering"
4. Select the desired channel.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel:
▷
▷
Using the button
Seite 161
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Press the button repeatedly until the de‐
sired program is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Display in the instrument cluster
Servotronic with selected program with
activated display of the System states of
the driving dynamics, refer to page 126.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off
assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is
used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Seite 162
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information
Depending on the settings, the cruise control
settings many change under certain conditions.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an increased
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Only use the system if driving
at constant speed is possible.
Warning
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupting, re‐
fer to page 164.
Store speed, refer to page 164.
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
trol, refer to page 165.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 164.
Seite 163
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few sec‐
onds or released while a gear is not engaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the current
speed.
▷ When M Dynamic Mode MDM is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedome‐
ter and in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 165.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
Press the button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
Seite 164
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on
the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up the stored speed
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Indicator light
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator light in the instrument
cluster indicates whether the system is
switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green: sys‐
tem is active, the marking indi‐
cates the desired speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange: sys‐
tem is interrupted, the marking
indicates the stored speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if en‐
gine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. The system de‐
tects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is
equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the
vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are
Seite 165
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones
and a display on the Control Display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The range, depending on obstacles and environ‐
mental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the following
situations:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the ob‐
ject.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Warning
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage the selector
lever in position R.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Seite 166
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press the park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Warning
Signal tones
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. For instance, if an ob‐
ject is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a
signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐
cated both in front of and behind the vehicle, an
alternating continuous signal is sounded.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Control
Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance Con‐
trol (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
Seite 167
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
cle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
sound sources is no longer present, the system
is again fully functional.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Seite 168
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Overview
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
trunk lid.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: switching on/off
manually
Press the park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display.
Switching the view via iDrive
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo can lead to malfunc‐
tions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius lines are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
Seite 169
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
"Obstacle marking"
Obstacles are marked, depending on the ve‐
hicle equipment.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Obstacle marking
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Parking using pathway and
turning radius lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning radius
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Seite 170
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Seite 171
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Climate control
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the
following components:
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Microfilter.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Depending on the equipment specification:
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC.
▷ Parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 88
2 Air distribution settings
3 Rear window defroster
4 Air flow
5 AUTO program
6 Temperature
7 Seat heating, right 88
8 Air conditioning
Seite 172
CONTROLS
Climate control
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
9 Recirculated-air mode 10 Interior temperature sensor
Climate control functions in
detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
by using the maximum cooling or heating power,
and then keeps it constant.
Adjusting
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the en‐
gine running.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 202, develops
and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐
mal.
AUTO program
Concept
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
the car's interior automatically.
The air flow, air distribution and temperature will
be controlled automatically depending on the in‐
terior temperature and the setting for the desired
temperature.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature and out‐
side influences, the air is directed to the wind‐
shield, side windows, upper body, and into the
floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 173, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Point the side vents toward the side windows.
Seite 173
Climate control
CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an op‐
erating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of
outside air into the vehicle is permanently
blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental
conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase air flow.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Adjusting the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Floor area.
To defrost windows and remove
condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
dows and remove condensation:
▷ Direct the air distribution onto the windows.
▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode, the micro‐
filter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 238.
Seite 174
CONTROLS
Climate control
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 88
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program
4 Display
5 Maximum cooling
6 Temperature, right
7 Seat heating, right 88
8 Air conditioning
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
10 Air distribution, right
11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
12 Air distribution, left
13 Rear window defroster
14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
15 To defrost windows and remove condensa‐
tion
Climate control functions in
detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
Seite 175
Climate control
CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
by using the maximum cooling or heating power,
and then keeps it constant.
Adjusting
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this tem‐
perature as quickly as possible, if needed, by in‐
creasing the cooling or heating output, and then
keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the en‐
gine running.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 202, develops
and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐
mal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information
The function is available above an external tem‐
perature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the en‐
gine running.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the program
active.
AUTO program
Concept
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
the car's interior automatically.
The air distribution and temperature are control‐
led automatically depending on the temperature
in the car's interior and the desired temperature
setting including the selected intensity of the air
flow.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 176, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Seite 176
CONTROLS
Climate control
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Point the side vents toward the side windows.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
In the AUTO program, the air flow may be re‐
duced during a phone call on the hands-free sys‐
tem.
Intensity
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic
control for the air flow and air distribution.
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
ously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an op‐
erating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside
air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the sup‐
ply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
Recirculated-air mode switches off automatically
at low external temperatures after a certain
amount of time in order to avoid window fogging.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the re‐
circulated-air mode and press the AUTO button
to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure
that air can flow to the windshield.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
program first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control may
be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Adjusting the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Operation
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
Seite 177
Climate control
CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and floor area:
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
To defrost windows and remove
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
The air flow can be adjusted with the program
active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the air conditioning or press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode, the micro‐
filter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen,
and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 238.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tempera‐
ture in the upper body region, arrow 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior temper‐
ature for the driver and front passenger.
Adjusting
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent so that the air is directed to‐
wards you, for instance when the vehicle is
too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Seite 178
CONTROLS
Climate control
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tempera‐
ture, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the adjusted interior
temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 3.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's in‐
terior and lowers its temperature, if needed.
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on
and off directly or by using two preset activation
times. The system remains switched on for
30 minutes.
The parked-car ventilation system is operated via
iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready
state.
▷ Direct operation or preset activation time:
does not depend on external temperature.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit
the maximum activation time to save the ve‐
hicle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation"
5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "For start time at:"
Activate the desired activation time.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the activation time is activated.
Seite 179
Climate control
CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 180
CONTROLS
Climate control
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems such as garage door
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
General information
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐
ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
Safety information
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
be controlled, the system is generally
compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
Control.
Additional questions are answered by:
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Seite 181
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Control elements on the interior
mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
remote control.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes
green rapidly. This erases all programming of
the buttons on the interior mirror.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will
slowly begin flashing orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6.
▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
onds: programming not completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
peat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after re‐
peated programming, please check if the system
to be controlled features a rolling code radio sys‐
tem.
Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
integrated Universal Remote Control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
Seite 182
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Synchronizing the universal remote control with
the system:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Program the desired button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the
programmed function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual
buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be
programmed.
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐
lease the button.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐
ming procedure is completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
onds: programming not completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
If the programming procedure is not completed,
the previous programming will remain un‐
changed.
Operation
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
erated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition
is started. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
mitted.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually.
Seite 183
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes green rapidly.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass in the mirror indicates
the direction in which you are driving.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such as
the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The
following setting options are displayed in succes‐
sion, depending on how long the control button
is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering set‐
ting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle
so that the compass operates correctly; refer to
World map with compass zones.
Seite 184
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for approx.
3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set com‐
pass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the control
button quickly and repeatedly until the num‐
ber of the compass zone that corresponds
with your location appears in the mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does not
change despite changing the direction of
travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic ob‐
jects or overhead power lines near the vehicle
and that there is sufficient room to drive
around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for approx.
6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the
display. Next, drive in a complete circle at
least once at a speed of no more than
4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the
"C" is replaced by the points of the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx. 12
to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button
again to switch between English "E" and German
"O".
Seite 185
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror
lighting switches on.
Ashtray/Cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
Installing
The ashtray can be inserted in both cup holders.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Cigarette lighter
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐
tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and burn themselves.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Slide the cover forward.
Seite 186
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup
holders.
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding.
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Front center console
Slide the cover forward.
Remove the socket or cigarette lighter cover.
Seite 187
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
In the front passenger floor area
The socket is located below the glove compart‐
ment.
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the left side in the
cargo area.
USB interface
Concept
Mobile devices with a USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
section on USB connections, refer to page 59.
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center armrest.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type A.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
▷ Charge current: max. 2.1 A, when equipped
with a second USB interface in the center
console.
Seite 188
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
In the center console
Slide the cover forward.
A USB interface is located in the center console.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type A.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 2.1 A.
Cargo area
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
the rear seat backrest.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 60
to 40. The left rear seat backrest is connected to
the center section.
With the through-loading system: the rear seat
backrest is divided at a ratio of 40-20-40.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from
the cargo area. The center section can be sepa‐
rately folded down from the rear.
Safety information
Warning
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
Seite 189
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the cargo area
1. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area
to release the rear seat backrest.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for‐
ward slightly.
3. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
Folding back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seating posi‐
tion and engage it.
Folding down the center section
Press the switch and pull the center section for‐
ward.
Seite 190
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are availa‐
ble in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 191.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer
to page 192.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 192.
▷ Front storage compartment, in front of the
cup holders, refer to page 193.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 193.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center con‐
sole, refer to page 193.
▷ With two rear seats: Storage compartment
between the rear seats, refer to page 193.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Seite 191
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid,
refer to page 76, for instance.
This prevents access to the glove compartment
and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.
Seite 192
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Front storage compartment
There is a storage compartment in the center
console.
Center armrest
Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning
The center armrest can be pushed forward or
backward and engages in the end positions.
Connection for an external audio
device
An external audio device, for instance an MP3
player, can be connected via the USB audio in‐
terface in the center armrest.
Storage compartment in
the rear
A storage compartment is located in the center
console.
Storage compartment
between the rear seats
There is a storage compartment between the
rear seats.
Cup holders
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages.
Seite 193
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Front
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
To open: slide the cover forward.
To close: slide the cover backward.
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after the
other.
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.
Clothes hooks
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the rear.
Storage compartments in
the cargo area
Storage compartment
One storage compartment each is located on the
left and right side.
Net for storage compartment
Smaller objects can be stored in the net of right
storage compartment.
Seite 194
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Multi-function hook
Warning
Improper use of the multi-function hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
A multi-function hook is located on each side of
the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 204, there
are two or four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to secure the
cargo, refer to page 204, and store small parts.
Seite 195
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS
BMW M2 Technology ............................................................................. 198
Things to remember when driving ........................................................ 199
Loading ..................................................................................................... 203
Saving fuel ................................................................................................ 206
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
BMW M2 Technology
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
High-performance engine
General information
With a displacement of 3 liters, the high-perform‐
ance engine generates a maximum power of
405 hp and a maximum torque of 405 lbs
ft/550 Nm. With its spontaneous response be‐
havior, a speed range of wide utility results. The
maximum engine speed is 7,500 rpm and is con‐
trolled electronically. Because of the high engine
dynamics, the maximum engine speed with the
vehicle stationary is reduced.
Warm-up
During the engine warm-up phase, the high-per‐
formance engine has a somewhat rougher run‐
ning behavior because of the emission controls.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system has
a slightly metallic undertone due to the nature of
the system.
Compound brake
The high-performance braking system has per‐
forated compound brake discs.
Because of particular structural characteristics,
there may be operation-related noises during
braking. The functional noises have no effect on
the performance, operational reliability, and dura‐
bility of the brake.
Drivetrain
With this vehicle, particular value was placed on
the direct connection from engine to the drive‐
train. Due to the torsionally rigid design of the
drivetrain, as is typical in a sports vehicle, the
transmission of the torque also gives acoustic
feedback.
When there are load changes, this may result in
clicking noises. The clicking noises do not impair
the operation or the service life of the compo‐
nents.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle
is not designed for use in motor sports competi‐
tion.
The standard brake linings and the wear indica‐
tors are not designed for racetrack operation.
Seite 198
DRIVING TIPS
BMW M2 Technology
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control.
Safety information
Warning
Due to new parts and components, safety and
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐
lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing
new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐
vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐
serve the break-in procedures of the respective
parts and components.
Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed 5,500 rpm and 106 mph/170 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
ces.
At 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Have drive-in checkup maintenance performed.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,100 miles/5,000 km
The engine and road speed can gradually be in‐
creased to a constant speed of
137 mph/220 km/h.
Use the maximum speed of 155 mph/250 km/h
only briefly, for instance when passing.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Seite 199
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Safety information
Warning
An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle
and can endanger occupants and other traffic
participants or damage the vehicle in the event
of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not drive with the trunk lid
open.
Driving with the trunk lid open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system
Warning
During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐
ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in
contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
tem, these materials can ignite. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not
remove the heat shields installed and never ap‐
ply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or
during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust
gas system.
Mobile communication devices
in the vehicle
Warning
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐
fluence one another. There is radiation due to
the transmission operations of mobile phones.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. If possible, in the car's interior use
only mobile phones with direct connections to
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
interference and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning.
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
contact between the tires and the road surface,
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and
brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the following:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than a maximum of 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Seite 200
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Safety information
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
mum indicated water level and the maximum
speed for driving through water.
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
quire such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
The pulsing of the brake pedal indicates that
ABS is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
discs can emit functional noises. Functional
noises have no effect on the performance and
operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area
around pedals and floor area
Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
for instance for cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐
tly press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them against
corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐
ciency.
Manual transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
M double-clutch transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down in sequential mode, refer to
page 114.
Safety information
Warning
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brakes wearing out and
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system.
Seite 201
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Warning
In idle state or with the engine switched off,
safety functions, for instance engine braking ef‐
fect, braking assistance and steering assis‐
tance, may not be available. There is a risk of
accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or
with the engine switched off.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are increased by the following
circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTICE
If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,
curbs or underground garage entrances, con‐
tact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, and the un‐
derbody may occur. There is a risk of damage
to property. Ensure that there is sufficient
ground clearance available.
M Driver's Package: driving in
the higher speed range
Warning
Damage to vehicle components can negatively
impact the driving performance at high speeds.
This includes, among other things, tires, under‐
carriage and parts for improving aerodynamics.
There is a risk of accident. Have damage cor‐
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Do not
drive at high speeds until the damage is cor‐
rected.
Seite 202
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Loading
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Safety information
Warning
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
changing the steering response. There is a risk
of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐
mitted gross weight.
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit
1.
Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
hicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
Seite 203
Loading
DRIVING TIPS
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing
cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow large cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet
straps, the floor net, or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
To secure the cargo there are two or four lashing
eyes in the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
To secure the cargo the floor net can also be
used.
Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
area floor.
Seite 204
DRIVING TIPS
Loading
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
General information
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Safety information
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The fixing points are located in the roof drip rail
above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐
tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 205
Loading
DRIVING TIPS
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for
the reduction of consumption and emission val‐
ues.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental
impact.
Remove unnecessary
cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐
lowing use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐
namics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and
glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open
results in increased air resistance and thereby re‐
duces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for
instance tire size may influence consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
ing on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐
gine up to operating temperature.
Seite 206
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐
cator, refer to page 127.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐
ator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine
during longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐
matically switches off the engine during a stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
Switch off any functions
that are not currently
needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and reduce
the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traf‐
fic.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
formed by a BMW service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 238.
Seite 207
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
MOBILITY
Refueling ................................................................................................... 210
Fuel ............................................................................................................ 212
Wheels and tires ...................................................................................... 214
Engine compartment .............................................................................. 229
Engine oil .................................................................................................. 232
Coolant ...................................................................................................... 236
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 238
Replacing components .......................................................................... 240
Breakdown assistance ........................................................................... 246
Care ........................................................................................................... 253
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Refueling
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 212, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Seite 210
MOBILITY
Refueling
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Closing
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with
an electrical fault.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Follow the following when
refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
Safety information
NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
Seite 211
Refueling
MOBILITY
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Fuel
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %,
i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
converter is permanently damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to
M100.
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.
Seite 212
MOBILITY
Fuel
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
stalling, especially under certain environmental
conditions such as high ambient temperature
and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
starting at high external temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life.
Seite 213
Fuel
MOBILITY
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire inflation pressure and tire characteristics
influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Driving dynamics.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure
may heat up significantly and sustain damage.
This will have a negative impact on aspects of
handling, such as steering and braking re‐
sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐
fore a long trip.
Tire inflation pressure
specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 215, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation
pressure specifications in the tire
inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐
bient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not
been exceeded.
Seite 214
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine, refer to page 214, the intended
tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted
tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from
the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the tire inflation
pressure values in the tire inflation pressure ta‐
ble, refer to page 215, and adjust as necessary.
These tire inflation pressure values can also be
found on the tire inflation pressure label on the
driver's door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up
to 100 mph/160 km/h
M2 Competition
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
235/40 R 18 95
V M+S XL Std
2.3 / 33 2.4 / 35
235/35 R 19 91
V M+S XL Std
2.6 / 38 2.5 / 36
Front: 245/35 R
19 93 (Y) XL Std
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 265/35 R
19 98 (Y) XL Std
- 2.4 / 35
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Warning
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
damage and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐
mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in
the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 215, and adjust as necessary.
Tire inflation pressure values
over 100 mph/160 km/h
M2 Competition
Without M Driver’s Package:
Seite 215
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
235/40 R 18 95
V M+S XL Std
2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41
235/35 R 19 91
V M+S XL Std
3.0 / 44 3.3 / 48
Front: 235/40 R
18 95 V M+S XL
Std
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 255/35 R
18 94 V M+S XL
Std
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/35 ZR
19 93 (Y) XL Std
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 265/35 ZR
19 98 (Y) XL Std
- 2.9 / 42
With M Driver’s Package:
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
Front: 245/35
ZR 19 93 (Y)
XL Std
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 265/35
ZR 19 98 (Y)
XL Std
- 2.9 / 42
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
the certification label on the driver’s door pillar.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0119
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0119: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Seite 216
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least
every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on
the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 0119 1st week, 2019
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Seite 217
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required min‐
imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are marked
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
tor.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected
while driving, immediately reduce speed and
stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this
purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐
ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires,
but have them replaced.
Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐
stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-
section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the
higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐
ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐
ble, avoid driving over objects or road condi‐
tions that may damage tires, or drive over them
slowly and carefully.
Seite 218
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer's service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
erances despite the same official size rating.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
on the function of a variety of systems, such as
the Anti-lock Brake System or Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control. There is a risk of accident. To main‐
tain good handling and vehicle response, use
only tires with a single tread configuration from
a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the
vehicle recommends that you use wheels and
tires that have been recommended by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer for your vehicle type. Follow‐
ing tire damage, have the original wheel/tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
Warning
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing
structures. With advanced age the service life
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Seite 219
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐
able from a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Rotating wheels between axles
Swapping the front wheels with the rear wheels
or vice versa is not permitted on vehicles with
different tire or rim dimensions on the front and
rear axles.
Storing tires
Tire inflation pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can
be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel.
To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that
have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding from the
tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM
wheel electronics replaced at the next oppor‐
tunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Seite 220
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the cargo
floor panel.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container holder
2 Compressor
3 Connector/cable for socket
4 Connection hose
5 On/off switch
6 Tire pressure gage
7 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during extended
operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
10 minutes.
Seite 221
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the com‐
pressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
3. Screw the connection hose onto the connec‐
tor of the sealant container.
4. Insert the sealant container on the compres‐
sor housing in an upright position.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve and
screw the filling hose of the sealant container
onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert the
plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.
Seite 222
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
7. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill
the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not reached:
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Unscrew the filling hose from the tire valve.
4. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire.
5. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1.
Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tire valve.
2. Pull the compressor connector out of the
socket inside the vehicle.
3. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the sealant container.
4. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer previously connected to the tire valve
with the available connector on the sealant
container.
This prevents leftover sealant escaping from
the sealant container.
5. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
6. Stow the Mobility System back in the cargo
area.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Correcting the tire inflation
pressure
1.
Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
side the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 2.5 bar.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ig‐
nition switched on or the engine running,
switch on the compressor.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the
button on the compressor.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐
tainer of the Mobility System at the next opportu‐
nity.
Seite 223
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Snow chains
Safety information
Warning
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.
Warning
Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
tires and vehicle components. There may be a
risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 235/40 R 18.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in
incorrect readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐
sult in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, if needed, briefly
activate M Dynamic Mode.
Maximum speed with snow
chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When a flat tire kit is used, an immediate wheel
change when there is a loss of tire inflation pres‐
sure in the event of a flat tire is not always neces‐
sary.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if
all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine.
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
Seite 224
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack.
Warning
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is
provided in order to perform a wheel change in
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use; for example, changing
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a
breakdown.
Warning
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example
snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
sistant surface.
Warning
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
Warning
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may
be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel housing.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Securing the vehicle against
rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for exam‐
ple a rock, in front of and behind the wheel that is
diagonally opposite to the wheel that you wish to
change.
Seite 225
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐
hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of
both the front and rear axles against the rolling
direction.
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug
bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
ing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Seite 226
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,
and grasp the vehicle jack crank with your
other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐
cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
Seite 227
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or
lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is
with the entire surface on the ground and the
relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm
above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle
manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐
ing lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
cle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change
1.
Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐
ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
est dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 228
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Overview
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Filler neck for washer fluid
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
5 Engine compartment fuse box
6 Oil filler neck
7 Coolant reservoir, charge air
8 Coolant reservoir, engine
Seite 229
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Hood
Safety information
Warning
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an
accident and damage to property. Have work in
the engine compartment performed by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐
ing components. Certain components in the
engine compartment can also move with the
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐
ing and hair away from moving parts.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the
hood.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the hood is
clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,
arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Seite 230
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in‐
ches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 231
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Engine oil
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐
ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for instance:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on the
Control Display depending on the engine oil
level.
Safety information
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
ing principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
gine oil pressure is too low.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Seite 232
MOBILITY
Engine oil
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Displaying the engine oil level
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case,
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long
trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral po‐
sition, clutch and accelerator pedals not de‐
pressed.
▷ M Double clutch transmission: selector lever
in selector lever position N and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
ature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
be added is indicated in the message displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 234.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition
before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Spilled engine oil can damage carbon parts.
Wipe up spilled engine oil using a lint-free cloth.
Safety information
Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
with operating materials. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
Seite 233
Engine oil
MOBILITY
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 229.
Adding engine oil
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 230.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the lid.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
Safety information
NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
tives.
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
rating.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
Oil rating
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
with the following oil rating can be added:
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-30.
Seite 234
MOBILITY
Engine oil
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
More information about suitable oil ratings and
viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
Seite 235
Engine oil
MOBILITY
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Coolant
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
The vehicle has two coolant reservoirs that are
located in the engine compartment.
To ensure the operational reliability of the vehi‐
cle, always check the coolant level of both cool‐
ant reservoirs.
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
ble for the vehicle. Information about suitable ad‐
ditives is available from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling system
open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
system with the engine cooled down.
Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
additives to come into contact with skin, eyes
or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives
only.
Coolant level
Checking
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
Seite 236
MOBILITY
Coolant
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the filler
neck.
6. Close the lid.
Adding
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Close the lid.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing of
coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 237
Coolant
MOBILITY
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Maintenance
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the opera‐
tional reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated
separately. Further information is available from a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into account
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses
these to calculate the need for maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 126, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote
control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. The serv‐
ice center can read this data out and suggest a
maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
was disconnected are not taken into account.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
service center or another qualified service center
Seite 238
MOBILITY
Maintenance
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance
and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
General information
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
move any devices connected at the OBD socket
before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐
cate component intended to be used in con‐
junction with specialized equipment to check
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐
agnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Seite 239
Maintenance
MOBILITY
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Replacing components
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do
not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
Replacing the front wiper blades
1.
To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
arms, refer to page 110.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and fold
up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of
removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Seite 240
MOBILITY
Replacing components
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Light and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have the relevant work carried out a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
A spare light box is available from a dealer's serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Follow the safety information, refer to page 241.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to page 241.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
Warning
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact
with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk
of injury. Only change bulbs after they have
cooled off.
Warning
Work on switched-on lighting systems can
cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When working on
the lighting system, switch off the lights in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.
NOTICE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new
bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth
or something similar, or hold the bulb by its
base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Warning
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, for instance water
droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Front lights, bulb replacement
LED headlights
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
All front lights and side turn signals are designed
with LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Seite 241
Replacing components
MOBILITY
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Turn signal
2 Outer brake lights
3 Inside brake light
4 Reversing light
5 Rear light
Bulb replacement
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to page 241.
Reversing light: 21-watt bulb, W21W.
The turn signals, brake lights, and rear lights fea‐
ture LED technology. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Removing the tail light
1. Opening trunk lid.
2. Open the two covers on the tail light.
3. With the handle of the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit, loosen and remove
the nuts on the two fasteners. Make sure that
the nuts do not drop into the bumper area. In
addition to the two outer fasteners, there is
another inner fastener.
4. Hold the grip rail in one hand, arrow 1, and
brace against the outside with your other
hand, arrow 2. Carefully pry out the tail light,
arrow 3, until the rubber mount releases from
the inner fastener.
5. Remove the plug from the bulb holder.
Seite 242
MOBILITY
Replacing components
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Replacing the bulbs
1. Turn the cover in the direction indicated on
the housing and remove it.
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the new bulb and cover in reverse or‐
der of removal.
Installing the tail light
1.
Connect the plug to the bulb holder.
2. Insert the tail light straight in and press it in,
arrow 1, until the rubber mount engages in
the inner fastener. Make sure when inserting
the tail light that the rubber lip, arrow 2, on
the top side of the tail light does not fold over.
Screw on the two nuts, arrow 3, and close
covers.
Central brake light and license plate
lights
Follow the safety information, refer to page 241.
These lights are made using LED technology. In
the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of an accident and
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should be
installed in your vehicle. Information on com‐
patible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.
Register the battery to the
vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have a service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop register the ve‐
hicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has
been replaced. Once the battery has been regis‐
tered again, all comfort features will be available
without restriction and any Check Control mes‐
sages displayed which relate to comfort features
will disappear.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a red
indicator light.
Charge the battery in the following situations:
Seite 243
Replacing components
MOBILITY
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
▷ When the inspection glass on the top of the
battery is black.
▷ When the take-off performance is insufficient.
The following circumstances can have a negative
effect on the performance of the battery:
▷ Frequent short-distance drives.
▷ The vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
Charging the battery
Charge the battery only when the engine is off
and via the starting aid terminals, refer to
page 249, in the engine compartment.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
example:
▷ Memory function: store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
General information
The fuses are located in two different places in
the vehicle.
Information on the fuse types and locations, as
well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
found on a separate sheet in the fuse box in the
cargo area.
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating.
In the engine compartment
General information
On right-hand drive vehicles, the fuses are lo‐
cated on the opposite side of the engine com‐
partment.
Seite 244
MOBILITY
Replacing components
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Removing the cover
1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen the
three cover screws, arrow 1.
2. Squeeze and raise the holder, arrow 2.
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Attaching the covers
1.
When attaching the cover, make sure that all
four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
three screws.
In the cargo area
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Information on the fuse types and locations, as
well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
Seite 245
Replacing components
MOBILITY
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the trunk lid.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area in the
storage compartment.
Seite 246
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
BMW Roadside Assistance
Concept
Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐
cle's condition is sent to the vehicle manufac‐
turer.
There are various ways of making contact.
▷ Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 123.
▷ Calling with a mobile phone.
▷ Via the BMW Connected app.
Requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
version with Intelligent emergency call or
BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Starting
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐
port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.
Via iDrive:
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the Roadside Assistance of
the manufacture is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if needed.
Select to dial the telephone number on a
connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐
mitted automatically.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help
enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle
via wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it
through the Service Specialist.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. "Teleservice Help"
The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored
for specific functions.
If this is not possible, further measures will be ini‐
tiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be
informed.
Emergency Request
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
tem or manually.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Intelligent emergency call establishes a connec‐
tion with the BMW Response Center.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
tions.
Seite 247
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner.
Functional requirements
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
the vehicle has been activated.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
cally initiated immediately after an accident of
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐
ton.
Manual triggering
1.
Tap the cover.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
on the button illuminates green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐
gency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until
the voice connection has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Response Center can take further steps to
help you under certain circumstances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐
sponse Center which serves to determine the
necessary rescue measures. For instance,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can be
established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐
sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
Warning
If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
ing connection.
Seite 248
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
NOTICE
In the case of body contact between the two
vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-
starting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no body contact occurs.
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐
cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐
formation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power con‐
sumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐
ment acts as the battery's positive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the bat‐
tery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to both ve‐
hicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.
1. Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid termi‐
nal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of
the cable to the positive terminal of the bat‐
tery, or to the corresponding starting aid ter‐
minal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the vehi‐
cle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another at‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery
to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Seite 249
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Manual transmission
Towing or pushing the vehicle
A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 113.
Follow the following instructions:
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn sig‐
nals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and steer‐
ing.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than
the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not
be possible to control the vehicle's response.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
With rear-wheel drive
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
M double-clutch transmission:
transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the
vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of
damage to property. The vehicle should only be
transported on a loading platform.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
Seite 250
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 115.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify
the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
be possible to control the vehicle's response.
There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the
gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the
tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the
vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried
in the vehicle.
Seite 251
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 240, are together in the cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
hicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
low the notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
M double-clutch transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the M double-clutch transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start
the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 248. If
the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter,
only tow-start while the engine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 102.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal.
After the engine starts, immediately press on
the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning
system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Seite 252
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Care
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the hood
is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTICE
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTICE
Water can penetrate in the windshield area due
to high-pressure washers. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid high-pressure
washers.
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
damage to property. Follow the following in‐
structions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.
Seite 253
Care
MOBILITY
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
manual transmission
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely.
To roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 113.
Driving into a vehicle wash with an
M double-clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Safety information
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when the ignition is switched off. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch
ignition off in vehicle washes.
General information
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely.
To roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 115.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Make sure that the remote control is in the vehi‐
cle.
Start the engine. Starting the engine, refer to
page 103.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced. The heat generated during braking
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the windows,
to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
Warning
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
structions on the container.
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and
extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
or discolored.
Seite 254
MOBILITY
Care
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Safety information
Warning
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
sensors and thereby result in a safety risk.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Have paintwork or paintwork
repairs on bumpers of vehicles with radar sen‐
sors performed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
only.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐
face.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Safety information
NOTICE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing
can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
nents, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with plenty of water, possi‐
bly with shampoo added, particularly when they
have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Seite 255
Care
MOBILITY
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Plastic components
NOTICE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly
with water, if needed.
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Light lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
Warning
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
safety belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
for instance for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Displays/screens
NOTICE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
kind can damage the surface of displays and
screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged with
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
not use any scratching materials.
Seite 256
MOBILITY
Care
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
Further information is available from a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Seite 257
Care
MOBILITY
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
REFERENCE
Technical data .......................................................................................... 260
Appendix ................................................................................................... 262
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................ 264
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Technical data
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
The technical data and specifications in the
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
urement method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
stance due to the selected special equipment,
tires, load and chassis version.
BMW M2
Width with mirrors in/mm 78.3/1,990
Width without mirrors in/mm 73/1,854
Height in/mm 55.5/1,410
Length in/mm 176.2/4,476
Wheelbase in/mm 106/2,693
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 38.4/11.7
Seite 260
REFERENCE
Technical data
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Weights
M2 Competition
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,430/2,009
M double-clutch transmission lbs/kg 4,430/2,009
Load lbs/kg 720/327
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,140/971
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,380/1,080
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Capacities
BMW M2
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 13.7/52.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer
to page 212.
Seite 261
Technical data
REFERENCE
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Seite 262
REFERENCE
Appendix
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Seite 263
Appendix
REFERENCE
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
A/C button, see Air conditioning 176
ABS, Antilock Brake System 157
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 117
Accessories and parts 10
Activated-charcoal filter 178
Activation times, parked-car ventilation 179
Active M differential 161
Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis‐
play 155
Adaptive Light Control 135
Additives, engine oil types 234
After washing vehicle 254
Airbags 138
Airbags, indicator and warning light 140
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air
mode 174, 177
Air conditioning 173, 176
Air distribution, manual 174, 177
Air flow, air conditioner 174
Air flow, automatic climate control 177
Air pressure, tires 214
Air vents, see Ventilation 178
Alarm system 80
Alarm, unintentional 81
All-season tires, see Winter tires 219
Ambient light 137
Antifreeze, washer fluid 111
Antilock Brake System, ABS 157
Anti-slip control, see DSC 159
Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 226
Approach control warning with city light braking
function 148
Approved axle load 261
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
Arrival time 131
Ashtray 186
Assistance when driving off 162
AUTO intensity 177
Automatic climate control 172
Automatic climate control with enhanced fea‐
tures 175
Automatic Curb Monitor 95
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐
bags 140
Automatic headlight control 134
Automatic locking 80
Automatic recirculated-air control 177
Automatic vehicle wash 253
AUTO program, automatic climate control 176
AUTO program, climate control 173
AUTO program, intensity 177
Auto Start/Stop function 104
Auto washing 253
Average consumption 130
Average speed 130
Axle loads, weights 261
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 87
Backrest, width 88
Band-aids, see First-aid kit 246
Battery, disposing of 244
Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 70
Battery, vehicle 243
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 250
Belt holder 91
Belts, safety belts 89
Beverage holder, cup holder 193
Bluetooth connection 57
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
BMW Homepage 8
BMW Internet page 8
BMW maintenance system 238
Seite 264
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
BMW M technology 198
Bottle holder, see Cup holder 193
Brake assistant 157
Brake discs, break-in 199
Brake force display 155
Brake lights, brake force display 155
Brake pads, break-in 199
Braking, information 201
Breakdown assistance 246, 247
Break-in 199
Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 155
Brightness of Control Display 54
Bulb replacement 241
Bulb replacement, front 241
Bulb replacement, rear 242
Bulbs and lights 241
Button, Start/Stop 102
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 248
C
Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
California Proposition 65 Warning 10
Calling up mirror adjustment 79
Calling up seat adjustment 79
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 146
Camera lenses, care 256
Camera, rearview camera 169
Can holder, see Cup holder 193
Care, displays 256
Care, vehicle 254
Care, washing the vehicle 253
Cargo 203
Cargo area 189
Cargo area, enlarging 189
Cargo area, loading 204
Cargo area, storage compartments 194
Cargo, stowing and securing 204
Carpet, care 256
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem 200
CBS Condition Based Service 238
Center armrest 193
Center console 38
Central Information Display (CID), see Control
Display 42
Central locking system 73
Central screen, see Control Display 42
Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 9
Changing parts 240
Changing wheels 224
Changing wheels/tires 219
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐
ber 14
Check Control 120
Checking the oil level electronically 232
Children, seating position 98
Children, transporting safely 98
Child restraint system 98
Child restraint system LATCH 100
Child restraint systems, mounting 99
Child seat, mounting 99
Child seats 98
Chrome parts, care 255
Cigarette lighter 186
Cleaning, displays 256
Climate control 172, 175
Clothes hooks 194
Cockpit 36
Combination switch, see Turn signals 107
Combination switch, see Wiper system 108
Comfort Access 73
Compartments in the doors 192
Compass 184
Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 57
Compound brake 198
Compressor 220
Computer, see Onboard Computer 129
Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Condensation on windows 178
Condensation under the vehicle 202
Condition Based Service CBS 238
Confirmation signal 79
Connect device 56
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment and Communication 8
Connecting mobile phone 56
Connecting smartphone 56
Connecting telephone 56
Seite 265
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Connections 56
Consumption, see Average consumption 130
Consumption, see Current consumption 125
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Container for washer fluid 111
Control Display 42
Control Display, settings 52
Controller 42, 43
Control systems, driving stability 157
Convenient opening with the remote control 69
Coolant 236
Coolant temperature 123
Cooling, maximum 176
Cooling system 236
Corrosion on brake discs 202
Cosmetic mirror 186
Couple device, see Pair device 56
Courtesy lights during unlocking 69
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 69
Cruise control 163
Cruise control without distance control, see
Cruise control 163
Cruising range 124
Cup holder 193
Current consumption 125
D
Damage, tires 218
Data protection, settings 55
Data, technical 260
Date 53
Date display 124
Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation 151
Daytime running lights 135
DCC, see Cruise control 163
Defrosting, see Defrosting the windows 174
Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 178
Defrosting the windows 174
Deleting personal data 55
Deletion of personal data 55
Destination distance 131
Device list 56
Differential lock 161
Digital clock 124
Digital compass 184
Dimensions 260
Dimmable exterior mirrors 95
Dimmable interior mirror 96
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 107
Display and input 40
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 136
Displays, care 256
Disposal, coolant 237
Disposal, vehicle battery 244
Distance control, see PDC 165
Distance to destination 131
Divided screen view, split screen 41
Double-clutch transmission 113
Drivelogic 116
Drivelogic, gear display 124
Drive mode 114
Drive-off assistant 162
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 159
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 146
Driver profiles 76
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 78
Driver profiles, importing profiles 78
Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 146
Driving Dynamics Control 118
Driving dynamics systems 126
Driving dynamics, system states 126
Driving instructions, break-in 199
Driving notes, general 200
Driving on racetracks 198
Driving program, see Drivelogic 116
Driving stability control systems 157
Driving tips 200
Drying air, see Air conditioning 173, 176
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 159
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 159
E
EfficientDynamics 125
Electronic oil measurement 232
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 159
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Seite 266
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 211
Emergency Request 247
Emergency service, see Breakdown assis‐
tance 247
Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 76
Energy control 125
Energy recovery 125
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 104
Engine, automatic switch-off 104
Engine compartment 229
Engine compartment, working in 230
Engine coolant 236
Engine oil 232
Engine oil, adding 233
Engine oil change 235
Engine oil filler neck 233
Engine oil temperature 130
Engine oil types to add 234
Engine start, jump-starting 248
Engine start, see Starting the engine 103
Engine stop 104
Engine temperature 130
Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
munication 8
Entering a vehicle wash 253
Equipment, interior 181
Error displays, see Check Control 120
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 159
Exchanging wheels/tires 219
Exhaust gas system 200
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 200
Exiting a vehicle wash 253
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 95
Exterior mirrors 94
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 95
External start 248
External temperature display 124
External temperature warning 124
F
Failure message, see Check Control 120
False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 81
Fan, see Air flow 174, 177
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 89
Fatigue alert 155
Filler neck for engine oil 233
Filter, see Microfilter 174
Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil‐
ter 178
Finding charging stations, see Charging stations
and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Fine wood, care 256
First-aid kit 246
Flat tire, changing wheels 224
Flat tire message, FTM 146
Flat tire message, TPM 143
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 145
Flat tire, repairing 220
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 141
Flat tire warning light, FTM 146
Flat tire warning light, TPM 143
Flooding 200
Floor carpet, care 256
Floor mats, care 256
Fogged up windows 174
Fold-away position, wiper 110
Fold back rear seat backrests 189
Foot brake 201
For Your Own Safety 9
Front airbags 138
Front lights 241
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐
vation 140
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 141
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 145
Fuel 212
Fuel cap 210
Fuel filler flap 210
Fuel gauge 123
Fuel quality 212
Fuel recommendation 212
Fuel, tank capacity 261
Fuse 244
Seite 267
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Remote Control 181
Gasoline 212
Gear change 115
Gear display, Drivelogic 124
Gear shift indicator 127
General driving notes 200
General settings 52
Glare shield 186
Glass sunroof, electric 83
Glass sunroof, initialize the system 84
Glove compartment 191
GPS geolocation, vehicle position 53
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Gross vehicle weight, approved 261
Ground clearance 202
H
Handbrake, see Parking brake 107
Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 182
Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Hazard warning flashers 246
Head airbags 139
Headlight control, automatic 134
Headlight courtesy delay feature 134
Headlight flasher 108
Headlight glass 241
Headlights 241
Headlights, care 254
Head restraints, front 91
Head restraints, rear 92
Heated steering wheel 96
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 204
High-beam Assistant 135
High beams 108
High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐
tant 135
Higher speed range 202
High-performance engine 198
Hills 201
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 162
Holder for beverages 193
Homepage 8
Hood 230
Horn 36
Hotel function, trunk lid 76
Hot exhaust gas system 200
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Hydroplaning 200
I
Ice warning, see External temperature warn‐
ing 124
Icy roads, see External temperature warning 124
Identification marks, tires 216
Identification number, see Vehicle identification
number 14
iDrive 40
Ignition off 102
Ignition on 102
Indicator and warning lights, see Check Con‐
trol 120
Indicator light, see Check Control 120
Individual air distribution 174, 177
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 76
Individual settings, see M Drive 157
Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Inflation pressure, tires 214
Inflation pressure warning, tires 145
Info Display, see Onboard Computer 129
Information 8
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 146
Input and display 40
Instrument cluster 119
Instrument lighting 136
Integrated key 72
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 64
Intelligent emergency call 247
Intelligent Safety 146
Intended use 9
Intensity, AUTO program 177
Interior equipment 181
Seite 268
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Interior lights 136
Interior lights during unlocking 69
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 69
Interior mirror 94
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 96
Interior mirror, compass 184
Interior mirror, manually dimmable 95
Interior motion sensor 81
Internet connection 60
Internet hotspot 60
Internet page 8
Interval display, service requirements 126
Interval mode 109
In the vicinity of the center console 38
In the vicinity of the roofliner 39
In the vicinity of the steering wheel 36
IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi‐
cle 64
J
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 227
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 83
Jam protection system, windows 82
Jump-starting 248
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 73
Key, mechanical 72
Key, see Remote control 68
Knee airbag 139
L
Label on recommended tires 219
Lane departure warning 153
Lane threshold, warning 153
Language, on the Control Display 52
LATCH child restraint fixing system 100
Launch Control 117
Leather, care 255
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 241
Light 133
Light-alloy wheels, care 255
Light control 135
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 241
Lighting 133
Light replacement 241
Light replacement, front 241
Light replacement, rear 242
Lights and bulbs 241
Light switch 133
List of all messages 54
Load 204
Loading 203
Location, vehicle position 53
Locking, automatic 80
Locking, see Opening and Closing 68
Locking, settings 79
Low beams 133
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐
tant 135
Lower back support 87
Low Speed Assistant 114
Lug bolt lock 226
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
rack 205
Lumbar support 87
M
Maintenance 238
Maintenance requirements 238
Maintenance, service requirements 126
Maintenance system, BMW 238
Make-up mirror 186
Malfunction displays, see Check Control 120
Manual air distribution 174, 177
Manual air flow 174, 177
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 211
Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 167
Manual operation, rearview camera 169
Manual transmission 112
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Matte finish 255
Maximum cooling 176
Maximum speed, display 127
Maximum speed, winter tires 220
M Compound brake 198
Seite 269
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
M differential, active 161
MDM, M Dynamic Mode 160
M double-clutch transmission 113
M Drive 157
M Driver's Package, driving instructions 202
M Dynamic Mode MDM 160
Measurement, units of 53
Medical kit 246
Memory function 93
M Engine Dynamics Control 118
Menu in instrument cluster 128
Menus 44
Menus, operating, iDrive 40
Messages 54
Messages, see Check Control 120
Microfilter 174, 178
Minimum tread, tires 218
Mirror 94
Mirror, see Memory function 93
Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐
cle 200
Mobility System 220
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 9
Moisture in headlight 241
Monitor, see Control Display 42
Mounting of child restraint systems 99
MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
M technology 198
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 36
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
N
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 91
Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 92
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 255
New wheels and tires 219
Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 239
OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 239
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 170
Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
grade 213
Odometer 123
Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
Oil 232
Oil, adding 233
Oil change 235
Oil change interval, service requirements 126
Oil filler neck 233
Oil types to add, engine 234
Onboard Computer 129
Onboard literature, printed 64
Onboard vehicle tool kit 240
On-call service, see Breakdown assistance 247
Online Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Opening and closing 68
Operating concept, iDrive 40
Operating via iDrive 44
Operation via touchscreen 45
Operation with the Controller 44
Optional equipment 9
Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol 177
Overheating of engine, see Coolant tempera‐
ture 123
Owner's Manual media 64
Owner's Manual, printed 64
P
Paint, vehicle 254
Pair device 56
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 80
Panic mode 80
Park Distance Control PDC 165
Seite 270
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Parked-car ventilation 179
Parked vehicle, condensation 202
Parking aid, see PDC 165
Parking brake 107
Parking lights 133
Parts and accessories 10
Passenger's side mirror, tilting downward 95
Pathway lines, rearview camera 170
PDC Park Distance Control 165
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 76
Plastic, care 256
Power failure 244
Power sunroof, glass 83
Power windows 82
Pressure, tires 214
Pressure warning, tires 145
Preventing Auto Start Stop 106
Printed onboard literature 64
Profiles, see Driver profiles 76
Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 47
Protective function, glass sunroof 83
Protective function, windows 82
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 42, 43
R
Racetrack operation 198
Radiator fluid 236
Radio-operated remote control, see Remote
control 68
Radio-ready state 102
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
Rain sensor 109
Rear lights 242
Rear socket 188
Rearview camera 168
Rear window defroster 174, 178
Recirculated-air filter 178
Recirculated-air mode 174, 177
Recommended fuel grade 213
Recommended tire brands 219
Refueling 210
Remaining range 124
Remote control, additional 71
Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
Remote control, integrated key 72
Remote control, loss 71
Remote control, malfunction 71
Remote control, opening/closing 68
Remote control, universal 181
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Replacing parts 240
Replacing wheels/tires 219
Reporting safety malfunctions 14
RES button, see Cruise control 163
Reserve warning, see Range 124
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142
Retreaded tires 219
Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis‐
tance 247
Roadside parking lights 133
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 182
RON recommended fuel grade 213
Roofliner 39
Roof load capacity 261
Roof-mounted luggage rack 205
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
Rubber components, care 255
S
Safe braking 201
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front
passenger seat 90
Safety belts 89
Safety belts, care 256
Safety systems, airbags 138
Saving fuel 206
Screen, see Control Display 42
Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 240
Sealant, see Mobility System 220
Seat heating, front 88
Seating position for children 98
Seite 271
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Seat, see Memory function 93
Securing cargo 204
Selection list in instrument cluster 128
Selector lever 113
Selector lever position 113
Sensors, care 256
Sequential mode 114
Service and warranty 11
Service requirements, Condition Based Service
CBS 238
Service requirements, display 126
Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
tion 8
Servotronic 161
SET button, see Cruise control 163
Settings, locking/unlocking 79
Settings, M Drive 157
Settings on the Control Display 52
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 116
Side airbags 138
Signaling, horn 36
Signals when unlocking 79
Sitting safely 85
Size 260
Slide/tilt glass roof 83
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
SMS text message, supplementary 123
Snow chains 224
Socket 187
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 239
Software update 62
SOS button 247
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Speed, average 130
Speed Limit Info 127
Speed limits, display 127
Speed warning 132
Split screen 41
Sport displays, torque display, performance dis‐
play 131
Stability control systems 157
Standard equipment 9
Start/stop, automatic function 104
Start/Stop button 102
Starting the engine 103
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Status control display, tires 142
Status information, iDrive 41
Status of Owner's Manual 9
Status, vehicle 132
Steering assistance 161
Steering wheel, adjusting 96
Stopping the engine 104
Storage compartment in the rear 193
Storage compartments 191
Storage, tires 220
Storing the vehicle 257
Stowing and securing cargo 204
Suitable devices 57
Suitable mobile phones 57
Summer tires, tread 218
Sun visor 186
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 64
Supplementary SMS text message 123
Switch, see Cockpit 36
Symbols 8
System states of driving dynamics 126
T
Tachometer 123
Tail lights 242
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 9
Technical data 260
Technology, BMW M 198
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Temperature, automatic climate con‐
trol 173, 175
Temperature display for external tempera‐
ture 124
Temperature, engine oil 130
Terminal, starting aid 249
Seite 272
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 80
Thigh support 87
Through-loading system 189
Tilt alarm sensor 81
Time 52
Time of arrival 131
Tire damage 218
Tire identification marks 216
Tire inflation pressure 214
Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM 145
Tire pressure 214
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 141
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 220
Tires, changing 219
Tire sealant, see Mobility System 220
Tires, everything on wheels and tires 214
Tire tread 218
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 8
Tool 240
Total vehicle weight 261
Touchpad 47
Touchscreen 45
Towing 250
Tow-starting 250
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 141
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Transmission, manual transmission 112
Transporting children safely 98
Tread, tires 218
Trip computer 131
Triple turn signal activation 108
Trip odometer 123
Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 123
Trunk, emergency unlocking 76
Trunk lid closing 76
Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 76
Trunk lid, hotel function 76
Trunk lid opening 75
Trunk lid via remote control 70
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 170
Turn signal, indicator light 122
Turn signals, operation 107
Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 242
TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
U
Unintentional alarm 81
Units of measurement 53
Universal remote control 181
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 68
Unlocking, settings 79
Updates made after the editorial deadline 9
Upholstery care 255
USB connection 59
USB interface, position in vehicle 188
USB port, see USB interface 188
Used battery, disposing of 244
Use, intended 9
Using a smartphone via voice activation 49
V
Vanity mirror 186
Vehicle battery 243
Vehicle, break-in 199
Vehicle care 254
Vehicle care products 254
Vehicle features and options 9
Vehicle identification number 14
Vehicle jack 227
Vehicle key, see Remote control 68
Vehicle paint 254
Vehicle position, vehicle location 53
Vehicle status 132
Vehicle storage 257
Vehicle wash 253
Vehicle wash, automatic 253
Vehicle, washing 253
Ventilation 178
Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 179
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 14
Voice activation system 49
Voice command response, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
Seite 273
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
W
Warning and indicator lights, see Check Con‐
trol 120
Warning displays, see Check Control 120
Warning messages, see Check Control 120
Warning triangle 246
Warranty 10
Washer fluid 111
Washer nozzles, windshield 110
Washer system 108
Washing the vehicle 253
Water on roads 200
Weights 261
Welcome lights 134
Welcome lights during unlocking 69
Wheel cleaner 255
Wheels, changing 219
Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 214
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 145
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 141
WiFi connection 60
Windows, powered 82
Windshield washer fluid 111
Windshield washer nozzles 110
Windshield washer system 108
Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper
system 108
Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 108
Winter storage, care 257
Winter tires, suitable tires 219
Winter tires, tread 218
Wiper 108
Wiper blades, replacing 240
Wiper fluid 111
Wiper, fold-away position 110
Wiper system 108
Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Wood, care 256
Word match concept, navigation 40
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 240
Seite 274
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
*BL2720665004*
01402720665 ue
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL2720665004*
01402720665 ue
Online Edition for Part no. 01402720665 - II/19
